Automatic date update in version.in
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
2571583a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
2571583a 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
2571583a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
3aa2d05a
NC
708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
709prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
710@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
387dd777
DP
831@kindex -plugin @var{name}
832@item -plugin @var{name}
833Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837wish.
838
839Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845just copy in the newest one.
846
26278bb8
UD
847@kindex --push-state
848@cindex push state governing input file handling
849@item --push-state
850The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864something as follows:
865
866@smallexample
867-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868@end smallexample
869
870@kindex --pop-state
871@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 872@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
873Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874flags governing input file handling.
875
a712da20
NC
876@kindex -q
877@kindex --emit-relocs
878@cindex retain relocations in final executable
879@item -q
880@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 881Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
882Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884in larger executables.
885
dbab7a7b
NC
886This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
4f471f39
RS
888@kindex --force-dynamic
889@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890@item --force-dynamic
891Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892to VxWorks targets.
893
252b5132
RH
894@cindex partial link
895@cindex relocatable output
896@kindex -r
1049f94e 897@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 898@item -r
1049f94e 899@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 900Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 901turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
902linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 905@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
906If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
62bf86b4
HPN
910When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914with input files in other formats at all.
915
252b5132
RH
916This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918@kindex -R @var{file}
919@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920@cindex symbol-only input
921@item -R @var{filename}
922@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
ff5dcc92 928For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 929followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 930the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
931
932@kindex -s
933@kindex --strip-all
934@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 935@item -s
252b5132
RH
936@itemx --strip-all
937Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939@kindex -S
940@kindex --strip-debug
941@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 942@item -S
252b5132
RH
943@itemx --strip-debug
944Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
a70f34c0
NC
946@kindex --strip-discarded
947@kindex --no-strip-discarded
948@item --strip-discarded
949@itemx --no-strip-discarded
950Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
951Enabled by default.
952
252b5132
RH
953@kindex -t
954@kindex --trace
955@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 956@item -t
252b5132 957@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 958Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
959
960@kindex -T @var{script}
961@kindex --script=@var{script}
962@cindex script files
963@item -T @var{scriptfile}
964@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
965Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 966@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 967@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
968output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
969the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
970specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
971options accumulate.
252b5132 972
14be8564
L
973@kindex -dT @var{script}
974@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
975@cindex script files
976@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
977@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
978Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
979
980This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
981processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
982command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
983@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
984behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
985command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
986the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
987@samp{gcc}).
988
252b5132
RH
989@kindex -u @var{symbol}
990@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
991@cindex undefined symbol
992@item -u @var{symbol}
993@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
994Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
995symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
996modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
997different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
998option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
999
0a618243
AB
1000If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1001into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1002undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1003instead.
1004
1005@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1006@cindex symbols, require defined
1007@cindex defined symbol
1008@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1009Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1010is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1011is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1012and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1013@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1014can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1015
252b5132
RH
1016@kindex -Ur
1017@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1019For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1020@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1021turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1022@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1023It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1024with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1025be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1026@samp{-r} for the others.
1027
c005eb9e
AB
1028@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1029@cindex orphan sections
1030@cindex sections, orphan
1031@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1032Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1033specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1034
1035@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1036
1037@table @code
1038@item place
1039Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1040the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1041@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1042
1043@item discard
1044All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1045@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1046
1047@item warn
1048The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1049issue a warning.
1050
1051@item error
1052The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1053@end table
1054
1055The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1056
577a0623
AM
1057@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1058@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1059Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1060@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1061missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1062specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1063multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1064input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1065in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1066
252b5132
RH
1067@kindex -v
1068@kindex -V
1069@kindex --version
1070@cindex version
1071@item -v
1072@itemx --version
1073@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1074Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1075lists the supported emulations.
1076
1077@kindex -x
1078@kindex --discard-all
1079@cindex deleting local symbols
1080@item -x
1081@itemx --discard-all
1082Delete all local symbols.
1083
1084@kindex -X
1085@kindex --discard-locals
1086@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1087@item -X
252b5132 1088@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1089Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1090system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1091or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1092
1093@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1094@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1095@cindex symbol tracing
1096@item -y @var{symbol}
1097@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1098Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1099option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1100to prepend an underscore.
1101
1102This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1103don't know where the reference is coming from.
1104
1105@kindex -Y @var{path}
1106@item -Y @var{path}
1107Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1108for Solaris compatibility.
1109
1110@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1111@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1112The recognized keywords are:
1113@table @samp
1114
1115@item combreloc
1116Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1117lookup caching possible.
1118
b8871f35
L
1119@item common
1120Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1121link.
1122
cd6d6c15 1123@item defs
560e09e9 1124Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1125shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1126
6aa29e7b
JJ
1127@item execstack
1128Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1129
b039ef04
L
1130@item global
1131This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1132the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1133of subsequently loaded libraries.
1134
cd6d6c15
NC
1135@item initfirst
1136This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1137It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1138before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1139the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1140the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1141objects.
1142
1143@item interpose
1144Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1145but the primary executable.
1146
5fa222e4
AM
1147@item lazy
1148When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1149dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1150the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1151Lazy binding is the default.
1152
cd6d6c15
NC
1153@item loadfltr
1154Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1155runtime.
1156
1157@item muldefs
1158Allows multiple definitions.
1159
1160@item nocombreloc
1161Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1162
b8871f35
L
1163@item nocommon
1164Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1165link.
1166
cd6d6c15 1167@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1168Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1169defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1170
1171@item nodefaultlib
1172Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1173ignore any default library search paths.
1174
1175@item nodelete
1176Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1177
1178@item nodlopen
1179Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1180
1181@item nodump
1182Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1183
6aa29e7b
JJ
1184@item noexecstack
1185Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1186
8dfef1bd
L
1187@item text
1188Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1189
1190@item notext
1191Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1192
1193@item textoff
1194Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1195
6aa29e7b
JJ
1196@item norelro
1197Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1198
cd6d6c15
NC
1199@item now
1200When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1201dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1202when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1203deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1204first called.
1205
1206@item origin
1207Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1208
6aa29e7b
JJ
1209@item relro
1210Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1211
24718e3b
L
1212@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1213Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1214
1215@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1216Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1217
04c3a755
NS
1218@item stack-size=@var{value}
1219Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1220Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1221@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1222
d258b828
IZ
1223@item bndplt
1224Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1225
889c2a67
L
1226@item noextern-protected-data
1227Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1228library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1229to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1230generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1231module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1232i386 and x86-64.
1233
954b63d4
AM
1234@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1235Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1236if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1237by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1238option.
1239
aec6b87e 1240@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
954b63d4
AM
1241Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1242object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1243@option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1244are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1245make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
aec6b87e 1246
4c10bbaa
L
1247@item noreloc-overflow
1248Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1249relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1250overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1251
caa65211 1252@item call-nop=prefix-addr
caa65211
L
1253@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1254@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1255@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1256Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1257to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1258@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
caa65211
L
1259@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1260@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1261@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1262Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1263
ee2fdd6f
L
1264@item ibtplt
1265Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1266Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1267
1268@item IBT
1269Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1270to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1271Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1272
48580982
L
1273@item shstk
1274Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1275to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1276Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1277
cd6d6c15
NC
1278@end table
1279
ece2d90e 1280Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1281
1282@kindex -(
1283@cindex groups of archives
1284@item -( @var{archives} -)
1285@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1286The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1287either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1288
1289The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1290references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1291the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1292archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1293object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1294would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1295they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1296resolved.
1297
1298Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1299it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1300more archives.
1301
69da35b5
NC
1302@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1303@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1304@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1305@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1306Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1307recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1308and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1309the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1310behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1311so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1312restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1313
4a43e768
AM
1314@kindex --as-needed
1315@kindex --no-as-needed
1316@item --as-needed
1317@itemx --no-as-needed
1318This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1319on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1320the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1321on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1322needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1323emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1324non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1325the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1326non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1327Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1328the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1329needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1330from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1331
e56f61be
L
1332@kindex --add-needed
1333@kindex --no-add-needed
1334@item --add-needed
1335@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1336These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1337their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1338options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1339and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1340
252b5132
RH
1341@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1342@item -assert @var{keyword}
1343This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1344
1345@kindex -Bdynamic
1346@kindex -dy
1347@kindex -call_shared
1348@item -Bdynamic
1349@itemx -dy
1350@itemx -call_shared
1351Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1352for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1353default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1354for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1355multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1356@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1357
a1ab1d2a
UD
1358@kindex -Bgroup
1359@item -Bgroup
1360Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1361section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1362object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1363@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1364only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1365
252b5132
RH
1366@kindex -Bstatic
1367@kindex -dn
1368@kindex -non_shared
1369@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1370@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1371@itemx -dn
1372@itemx -non_shared
1373@itemx -static
1374Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1375platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1376variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1377may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1378library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1379option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1380option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1381shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1382references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1383libraries.
252b5132
RH
1384
1385@kindex -Bsymbolic
1386@item -Bsymbolic
1387When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1388definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1389for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1390within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1391@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1392executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1393the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1394support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1395
40b36307
L
1396@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1397@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1398When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1399symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1400This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1401when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1402to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1403This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1404libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1405
55255dae
L
1406@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1407@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1408Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1409typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1410global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1411within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1412to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1413in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1414which support shared libraries.
1415
1416The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1417scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1418
40b36307
L
1419@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1420@item --dynamic-list-data
1421Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1422
1423@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1424@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1425Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1426is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1427
0b8a70d9
L
1428@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1429@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1430Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1431
252b5132
RH
1432@kindex --check-sections
1433@kindex --no-check-sections
1434@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1435@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1436Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1437been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1438perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1439suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1440allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1441restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1442Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1443force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1444option.
252b5132 1445
ddbb8a31
NC
1446@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1447@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1448@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1449@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1450This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1451by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1452command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1453output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1454input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1455specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1456follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1457behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1458
1459This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1460libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1461mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1462their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1463required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1464the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1465dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1466symbols.
1467
252b5132
RH
1468@cindex cross reference table
1469@kindex --cref
1470@item --cref
1471Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1472generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1473Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1474
1475The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1476easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1477sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1478symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1479definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1480where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1481symbol are listed.
252b5132 1482
4818e05f
AM
1483@cindex common allocation
1484@kindex --no-define-common
1485@item --no-define-common
1486This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1487The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1488@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1489
1490The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1491the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1492of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1493forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1494Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1495from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1496This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1497and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1498duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1499paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1500
7bdf4127
AB
1501@cindex group allocation in linker script
1502@cindex section groups
1503@cindex COMDAT
1504@kindex --force-group-allocation
1505@item --force-group-allocation
1506This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1507normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1508default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1509change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1510command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1511effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1512
252b5132 1513@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1514@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1515@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1516Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1517address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1518times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1519limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1520context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1521symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1522constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1523using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1524@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1525equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1526
1527@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1528@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1529@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1530@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1531@itemx --no-demangle
1532These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1533and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1534present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1535underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1536mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1537different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1538to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1539demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1540is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1541
1542@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1543@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1544@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1545@item -I@var{file}
1546@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1547Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1548generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1549linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1550doing.
1551
9b8b325a
RF
1552@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1553@item --no-dynamic-linker
1554When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1555linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1556executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1557entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1558
a70f34c0
NC
1559@kindex --embedded-relocs
1560@item --embedded-relocs
1561This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1562that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1563is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1564targets.
1565
7ce691ae 1566@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1567@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1568@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1569@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1570Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1571with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1572
252b5132
RH
1573@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1574@item --force-exe-suffix
1575Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1576
1577If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1578@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1579the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1580option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1581Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1582it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1583
1584@kindex --gc-sections
1585@kindex --no-gc-sections
1586@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1587@item --gc-sections
1588@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1589Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1590targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1591performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1592@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1593collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1594implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1595
d5465ba2
AM
1596@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1597examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1598symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1599command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1600referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1601libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1602referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1603the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1604relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1605
ac69cbc6 1606This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1607@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1608specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1609a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1610
c17d87de
NC
1611@kindex --print-gc-sections
1612@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1613@cindex garbage collection
1614@item --print-gc-sections
1615@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1616List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1617printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1618collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1619default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1620be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1621line.
1622
22185505 1623@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1624@cindex garbage collection
1625@item --gc-keep-exported
1626When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1627collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1628default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1629executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1630collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1631Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1632it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1633ELF format targets.
1634
30824704
RM
1635@kindex --print-output-format
1636@cindex output format
1637@item --print-output-format
1638Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1639other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1640in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1641
3604cb1f
TG
1642@kindex --print-memory-usage
1643@cindex memory usage
1644@item --print-memory-usage
1645Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1646the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1647quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1648headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1649parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1650
1651@smallexample
1652Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1653 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1654 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1655@end smallexample
1656
252b5132
RH
1657@cindex help
1658@cindex usage
1659@kindex --help
1660@item --help
1661Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1662
ea20a7da
CC
1663@kindex --target-help
1664@item --target-help
1665Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1666
2509a395
SL
1667@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1668@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1669Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1670@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1671
1672@cindex memory usage
1673@kindex --no-keep-memory
1674@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1675@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1676symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1677instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1678necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1679while linking a large executable.
1680
1681@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1682@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1683@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1684@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1685Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1686is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1687The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1688behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1689libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1690
aa713662
L
1691@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1692@kindex -z muldefs
1693@item --allow-multiple-definition
1694@itemx -z muldefs
1695Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1696report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1697first definition will be used.
1698
b79e8c78 1699@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1700@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1701@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1702@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1703Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1704This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1705determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1706shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1707how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1708
903249d7
NC
1709The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1710referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1711an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1712a shared library.
1713
1714The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1715libraries specified at link time are that:
1716
1717@itemize @bullet
1718@item
1719A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1720that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1721resolvable at load time.
1722@item
1723There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1724symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1725
1726The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1727select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1728architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1729appropriate memset function.
1730@end itemize
b79e8c78 1731
31941635
L
1732@kindex --no-undefined-version
1733@item --no-undefined-version
1734Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1735it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1736will be issued instead.
1737
3e3b46e5
PB
1738@kindex --default-symver
1739@item --default-symver
1740Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1741exported symbols.
1742
1743@kindex --default-imported-symver
1744@item --default-imported-symver
1745Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1746imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1747
252b5132
RH
1748@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1749@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1750Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1751files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1752been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1753This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1754errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1755have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1756inappropriate.
1757
fe7929ce
AM
1758@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1759@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1760Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1761library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1762
252b5132
RH
1763@kindex --no-whole-archive
1764@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1765Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1766archive files.
1767
1768@cindex output file after errors
1769@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1770@item --noinhibit-exec
1771Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1772Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1773errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1774when it issues any error whatsoever.
1775
0a9c1c8e
CD
1776@kindex -nostdlib
1777@item -nostdlib
1778Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1779command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1780(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1781
252b5132 1782@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1783@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1784@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1785@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1786file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1787@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1788object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1789object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1790should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1791usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1792name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1793list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1794command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1795this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1796@end ifclear
1797
76359541
TP
1798@kindex --out-implib
1799@item --out-implib @var{file}
1800Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1801the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1802library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1803may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1804behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1805step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1806the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1807
36af4a4e
JJ
1808@kindex -pie
1809@kindex --pic-executable
1810@item -pie
1811@itemx --pic-executable
1812@cindex position independent executables
1813Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1814ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1815libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1816address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1817normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1818defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1819
252b5132
RH
1820@kindex -qmagic
1821@item -qmagic
1822This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1823
1824@kindex -Qy
1825@item -Qy
1826This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1827
1828@kindex --relax
1829@cindex synthesizing linker
1830@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1831@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1832@item --relax
28d5f677 1833@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1834An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1835@ifset GENERIC
1836This option is only supported on a few targets.
1837@end ifset
1838@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1839@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1840@end ifset
1841@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1842@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1843@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1844@ifset XTENSA
1845@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1846@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1847@ifset M68HC11
1848@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1849@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1850@ifset NIOSII
1851@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1852@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1853@ifset POWERPC
1854@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1855@end ifset
252b5132 1856
28d5f677
NC
1857On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1858global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1859addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1860synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1861instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1862
1863On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1864debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1865@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1866This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1867family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1868@end ifset
1869
1870@ifset GENERIC
1871On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1872but ignored.
1873@end ifset
1874
28d5f677
NC
1875On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1876@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1877
252b5132
RH
1878@cindex retaining specified symbols
1879@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1880@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1881@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1882@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1883Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1884discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1885symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1886@ifset GENERIC
1887(such as VxWorks)
1888@end ifset
1889where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1890run-time memory.
1891
1892@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1893or symbols needed for relocations.
1894
1895You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1896line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1897
1898@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1899@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1900@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1901@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1902Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1903linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1904arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1905them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1906also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1907objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1908@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1909ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1910@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1911
ff5dcc92 1912The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1913SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1914@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1915runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1916options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1917gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1918file systems.
252b5132 1919
ff5dcc92 1920For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1921followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1922the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1923@end ifset
1924
1925@ifset GENERIC
1926@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1927@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1928@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1929When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1930happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1931of the input files.
1932
1933When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1934non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1935shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1936explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1937specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1938@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1939either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1940appearing multiple times.
1941
e680a6b6
NC
1942The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1943directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1944containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1945and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
194664-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1947
1948The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1949@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1950supported.
1951
28c309a2
NC
1952This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1953that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1954is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1955runtime linker would do.
1956
252b5132 1957The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1958libraries:
252b5132
RH
1959@enumerate
1960@item
ff5dcc92 1961Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1962@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1963Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1964between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1965specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1966used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1967at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1968by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1969the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1970@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1971On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1972@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1973environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1974@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1975On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1976directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1977@item
a1b8d843 1978For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1979variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1980@item
ec4eb78a
L
1981For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1982@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1983libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1984@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1985@item
252b5132
RH
1986The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1987@item
1988For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1989exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1990@end enumerate
1991
1992If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1993warning and continue with the link.
1994@end ifset
1995
1996@kindex -shared
1997@kindex -Bshareable
1998@item -shared
1999@itemx -Bshareable
2000@cindex shared libraries
2001Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2002and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2003shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2004undefined symbols in the link.
2005
252b5132 2006@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2007@item --sort-common
2008@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2009@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2010This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2011ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2012sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2013eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2014between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2015specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2016
2509a395
SL
2017@kindex --sort-section=name
2018@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2019This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2020patterns in the linker script.
2021
2509a395
SL
2022@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2023@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2024This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2025patterns in the linker script.
2026
a70f34c0
NC
2027@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2028@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2029This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2030.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2031post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2032
252b5132 2033@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2034@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2035Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2036each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2037size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2038
2039@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2040@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2041Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2042output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2043This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2044certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2045cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2046that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2047support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2048input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2049more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2050many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2051
2052@kindex --stats
2053@item --stats
2054Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2055as execution time and memory usage.
2056
2509a395 2057@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2058@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2059Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2060configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2061that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2062
a70f34c0
NC
2063@kindex --task-link
2064@item --task-link
2065This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2066file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2067
252b5132
RH
2068@kindex --traditional-format
2069@cindex traditional format
2070@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2071For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2072the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2073use the traditional format instead.
2074
2075@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2076For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2077symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2078full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2079@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2080trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2081combine duplicate entries.
2082
2509a395
SL
2083@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2084@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2085Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2086address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2087times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2088line.
2089@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2090for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2091@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2092should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2093sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2094
2509a395
SL
2095@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2096@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2097@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2098@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2099@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2100@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2101@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2102Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2103@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2104
2509a395
SL
2105@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2106@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2107@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2108When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2109byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2110
9d5777a3
RM
2111@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2112@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2113@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2114When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2115the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2116text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2117
0d705e9f
AM
2118@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2119@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2120@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2121When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2122model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2123
560e09e9
NC
2124@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2125@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2126Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2127values for @samp{method}:
2128
2129@table @samp
2130@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2131Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2132
2133@item report-all
da8bce14 2134Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2135
2136@item ignore-in-object-files
2137Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2138ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2139
2140@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2141Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2142ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2143when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2144libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2145command line.
2146@end table
2147
2148The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2149by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2150
2151Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2152unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2153can change this to a warning.
2154
1715a13c
L
2155@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2156@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2157@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2158@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2159Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2160supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2161the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2162argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2163
2164@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2165@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2166@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2167Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2168used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2169about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2170is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2171see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2172use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2173symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2174@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2175
7ce691ae 2176@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2177@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2178@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2179@item --warn-common
2180Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2181a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2182but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2183you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2184Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2185warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2186
2187There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2188
2189@table @samp
2190@item int i = 1;
2191A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2192file.
2193
2194@item extern int i;
2195An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2196There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2197variable somewhere.
2198
2199@item int i;
2200A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2201variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2202The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2203single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2204size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2205a definition of the same variable.
2206@end table
2207
2208The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2209Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2210just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2211encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2212a common symbol.
2213
2214@enumerate
2215@item
2216Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2217definition for the symbol.
2218@smallexample
2219@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2220 overridden by definition
2221@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2222@end smallexample
2223
2224@item
2225Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2226the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2227except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2228@smallexample
2229@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2230 overriding common
2231@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2232@end smallexample
2233
2234@item
2235Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2236@smallexample
2237@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2238 of `@var{symbol}'
2239@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2240@end smallexample
2241
2242@item
2243Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2244@smallexample
2245@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2246 overridden by larger common
2247@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2248@end smallexample
2249
2250@item
2251Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2252the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2253encountered in a different order.
2254@smallexample
2255@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2256 overriding smaller common
2257@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2258@end smallexample
2259@end enumerate
2260
2261@kindex --warn-constructors
2262@item --warn-constructors
2263Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2264object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2265detect the use of global constructors.
2266
2267@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2268@item --warn-multiple-gp
2269Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2270This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2271Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2272section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2273of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2274base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2275base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2276bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2277large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2278values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2279option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2280
2281@kindex --warn-once
2282@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2283@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2284@item --warn-once
2285Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2286which refers to it.
2287
2288@kindex --warn-section-align
2289@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2290@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2291@item --warn-section-align
2292Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2293alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2294The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2295is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2296the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2297
8fdd7217
NC
2298@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2299@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2300Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2301
a0c402a5
L
2302@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2303@item --warn-alternate-em
2304Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2305
560e09e9
NC
2306@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2307@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2308If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2309@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2310This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2311
2312@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2313@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2314This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2315it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2316
252b5132
RH
2317@kindex --whole-archive
2318@cindex including an entire archive
2319@item --whole-archive
2320For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2321@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2322in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2323files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2324library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2325library. This option may be used more than once.
2326
7ec229ce 2327Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2328about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2329Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2330list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2331your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2332
2509a395
SL
2333@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2334@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2335Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2336@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2337undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2338@var{symbol}.
2339
2340This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2341wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2342wishes to call the system function, it should call
2343@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2344
2345Here is a trivial example:
2346
2347@smallexample
2348void *
cc2f008e 2349__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2350@{
cc2f008e 2351 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2352 return __real_malloc (c);
2353@}
2354@end smallexample
2355
ff5dcc92 2356If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2357all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2358instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2359call the real @code{malloc} function.
2360
2361You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2362links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2363you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2364file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2365call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2366
6aa29e7b 2367@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2368@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2369@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2370@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2371Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2372(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2373section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2374
e41b3a13
JJ
2375@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2376@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2377Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2378generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2379if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2380
6c1439be
L
2381@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2382@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2383@item --enable-new-dtags
2384@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2385This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2386systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2387@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2388and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2389If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2390created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2391those options are only available for ELF systems.
2392
2d643429 2393@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2394@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2395Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2396close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2397time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2398increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2399value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2400
fdc90cb4
JJ
2401@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2402@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2403Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2404@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2405new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2406the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2407hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2408
0ce398f1
L
2409@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2410@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2411@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2412@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2413@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2414@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2415@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2416@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2417On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2418compressed using zlib.
2419
2420@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2421sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2422DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2423instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2424also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2425sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2426
2427The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2428@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2429
2430Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2431sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2432for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2433uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2434
2435The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2436involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2437default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2438@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2439
35835446
JR
2440@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2441@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2442This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2443linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2444for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2445about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2446
4f9c04f7 2447Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24481021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2449run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2450has been used.
2451
2452The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2453enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2454
c0065db7
RM
2455@kindex --build-id
2456@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2457@item --build-id
2458@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2459Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2460or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2461unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2462@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2463@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2464@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2465the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2466string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2467@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2468is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2469
2470The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2471that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2472unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2473to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2474file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2475string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2476
2477Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2478@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2479@end table
2480
0285c67d
NC
2481@c man end
2482
36f63dca 2483@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2484
0285c67d
NC
2485@c man begin OPTIONS
2486
ff5dcc92 2487The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2488the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2489normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2490use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2491@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2492like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2493symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2494object file).
2495
2496In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2497support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2498PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2499values by either a space or an equals sign.
2500
ff5dcc92 2501@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2502
2503@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2504@item --add-stdcall-alias
2505If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2506as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2507[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2508
2509@kindex --base-file
2510@item --base-file @var{file}
2511Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2512addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2513@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2514[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2515
2516@kindex --dll
2517@item --dll
2518Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2519@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2520file.
bb10df36 2521[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2522
88183869
DK
2523@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2524@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2525@item --enable-long-section-names
2526@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2527The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2528the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2529for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2530fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2531to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2532allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2533disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2534generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2535as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2536with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2537GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2538information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2539option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2540section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2541when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2542image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2543[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2544
252b5132
RH
2545@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2546@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2547@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2548@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2549If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2550do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2551only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2552resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2553undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2554@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2555to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2556warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2557import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2558to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2559feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2560@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2561mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2562[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2563
522f09cd
KT
2564@kindex --leading-underscore
2565@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2566@item --leading-underscore
2567@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2568For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2569in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2570disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2571
252b5132
RH
2572@cindex DLLs, creating
2573@kindex --export-all-symbols
2574@item --export-all-symbols
2575If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2576be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2577otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2578explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2579attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2580option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2581@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2582@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2583exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2584re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2585such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2586@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2587@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2588Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2589not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2590extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2591(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2592These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2593@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2594@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2595@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2596@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2597[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2598
2599@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2600@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2601Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2602exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2603[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2604
2927aaca
NC
2605@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2606@item --exclude-all-symbols
2607Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2608[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2609
252b5132
RH
2610@kindex --file-alignment
2611@item --file-alignment
2612Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2613file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2614512.
bb10df36 2615[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2616
2617@cindex heap size
2618@kindex --heap
2619@item --heap @var{reserve}
2620@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2621Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2622to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2623committed.
bb10df36 2624[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2625
2626@cindex image base
2627@kindex --image-base
2628@item --image-base @var{value}
2629Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2630the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2631is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2632your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2633other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2634for dlls.
bb10df36 2635[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2636
2637@kindex --kill-at
2638@item --kill-at
2639If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2640symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2641[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2642
26d2d8a2
BF
2643@kindex --large-address-aware
2644@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2645If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2646header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2647greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2648or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2649section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2650[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2651
f69a2f97
NC
2652@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2653@item --disable-large-address-aware
2654Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2655This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2656driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2657addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2658[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2659
252b5132
RH
2660@kindex --major-image-version
2661@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2662Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2663[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2664
2665@kindex --major-os-version
2666@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2667Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2668[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2669
2670@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2671@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2672Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2673[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2674
2675@kindex --minor-image-version
2676@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2677Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2678[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2679
2680@kindex --minor-os-version
2681@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2682Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2683[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2684
2685@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2686@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2687Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2688[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2689
2690@cindex DEF files, creating
2691@cindex DLLs, creating
2692@kindex --output-def
2693@item --output-def @var{file}
2694The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2695file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2696(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2697library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2698automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2699[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2700
b044cda1 2701@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2702@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2703@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2704@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2705Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2706@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2707By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2708for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2709execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2710[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2711
2712@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2713@item --disable-auto-image-base
2714Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2715user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2716default.
bb10df36 2717[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2718
2719@cindex DLLs, linking to
2720@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2721@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2722When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2723search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2724@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2725between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2726uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2727@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2728[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2729
2730@kindex --enable-auto-import
2731@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2732Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2733DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2734building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2735'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2736to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2737specification published by Microsoft.
2738
e2a83dd0
NC
2739Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2740data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2741placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2742around a problem with consts that is described here:
2743http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2744
4d8907ac
DS
2745Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2746see this message:
0d888aac 2747
ece2d90e 2748"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2749documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2750
ece2d90e
NC
2751This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2752ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2753allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2754fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2755constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2756multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2757this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2758of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2759the warning, and exit.
2760
2761There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2762data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2763
2fa9fc65
NC
2764One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2765of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2766this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2767
c0065db7
RM
2768A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2769that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2770there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2771a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2772
2773@example
2774extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2775extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2776 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2777@end example
2778
2779or
2780
2781@example
2782extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2783extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2784 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2785@end example
2786
c0065db7 2787For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2788is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2789
2790@example
2791extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2792extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2793 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2794@end example
2795
c406afaf
NC
2796or
2797
2798@example
2799extern long long extern_ll;
2800extern_ll -->
2801 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2802@end example
2803
2fa9fc65 2804A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2805'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2806@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2807requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2808building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2809merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2810between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2811constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2812
2813Original:
2814@example
2815--foo.h
2816extern int arr[];
2817--foo.c
2818#include "foo.h"
2819void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2820 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2821@}
2822@end example
2823
2824Solution 1:
2825@example
2826--foo.h
2827extern int arr[];
2828--foo.c
2829#include "foo.h"
2830void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2831 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2832 volatile int *parr = arr;
2833 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2834@}
2835@end example
2836
2837Solution 2:
2838@example
2839--foo.h
2840/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2841#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2842 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2843#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2844#else
2845#define FOO_IMPORT
2846#endif
2847extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2848--foo.c
2849#include "foo.h"
2850void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2851 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2852@}
2853@end example
2854
c0065db7 2855A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2856library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2857for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2858functions).
bb10df36 2859[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2860
2861@kindex --disable-auto-import
2862@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2863Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2864@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2865[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2866
2fa9fc65
NC
2867@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2868@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2869If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2870that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2871a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2872environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2873[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2874
2875@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2876@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2877Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2878DLLs.
bb10df36 2879[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2880
b044cda1
CW
2881@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2882@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2883Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2884[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2885
252b5132
RH
2886@kindex --section-alignment
2887@item --section-alignment
2888Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2889addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2890[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2891
2892@cindex stack size
2893@kindex --stack
2894@item --stack @var{reserve}
2895@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2896Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2897to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2898committed.
bb10df36 2899[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2900
2901@kindex --subsystem
2902@item --subsystem @var{which}
2903@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2904@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2905Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2906legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2907@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2908the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2909@var{which}.
bb10df36 2910[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2911
2f563b51
DK
2912The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2913of the PE file header:
2914[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2915
2d5c3743
NC
2916@kindex --high-entropy-va
2917@item --high-entropy-va
2918Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2919(ASLR).
2920
2f563b51
DK
2921@kindex --dynamicbase
2922@item --dynamicbase
2923The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2924randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2925Vista for i386 PE targets.
2926
2927@kindex --forceinteg
2928@item --forceinteg
2929Code integrity checks are enforced.
2930
2931@kindex --nxcompat
2932@item --nxcompat
2933The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2934This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2935
2936@kindex --no-isolation
2937@item --no-isolation
2938Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2939
2940@kindex --no-seh
2941@item --no-seh
2942The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2943this image.
2944
2945@kindex --no-bind
2946@item --no-bind
2947Do not bind this image.
2948
2949@kindex --wdmdriver
2950@item --wdmdriver
2951The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2952
2f563b51
DK
2953@kindex --tsaware
2954@item --tsaware
2955The image is Terminal Server aware.
2956
0cb112f7
CF
2957@kindex --insert-timestamp
2958@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2959@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2960Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2961as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2962other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2963will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2964same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2965can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2966that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2967identically.
252b5132
RH
2968@end table
2969
0285c67d
NC
2970@c man end
2971
ac145307
BS
2972@ifset C6X
2973@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2974
2975@c man begin OPTIONS
2976
2977The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2978libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2979all executables use an index of 0.
2980
2981@table @gcctabopt
2982
2983@kindex --dsbt-size
2984@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2985This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2986or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2987entries.
2988
2989@kindex --dsbt-index
2990@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2991This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2992to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2993executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2994@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2995
fbd9ad90
PB
2996@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2997The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2998exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2999
ac145307
BS
3000@end table
3001
3002@c man end
3003@end ifset
3004
93fd0973
SC
3005@ifset M68HC11
3006@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3007
3008@c man begin OPTIONS
3009
3010The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3011memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3012
3013@table @gcctabopt
3014
3015@kindex --no-trampoline
3016@item --no-trampoline
3017This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3018is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3019instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3020
3021@kindex --bank-window
3022@item --bank-window @var{name}
3023This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3024the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3025The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3026paging and addresses within the memory window.
3027
3028@end table
3029
3030@c man end
3031@end ifset
3032
7fb9f789
NC
3033@ifset M68K
3034@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3035
3036@c man begin OPTIONS
3037
3038The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3039when linking for 68K targets.
3040
3041@table @gcctabopt
3042
3043@kindex --got
3044@item --got=@var{type}
3045This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3046@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3047@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3048Info entry for @file{ld}.
3049
3050@end table
3051
3052@c man end
3053@end ifset
3054
833794fc
MR
3055@ifset MIPS
3056@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3057
3058@c man begin OPTIONS
3059
3060The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3061generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3062linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3063
3064@table @gcctabopt
3065
3066@kindex --insn32
3067@item --insn32
3068@kindex --no-insn32
3069@itemx --no-insn32
3070These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3071generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3072or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
307332-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3074used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3075possible.
3076
8b10b0b3
MR
3077@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3078@item --ignore-branch-isa
3079@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3080@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3081These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3082transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3083accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3084is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3085instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3086equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3087calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3088a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3089an error.
3090
833794fc
MR
3091@end table
3092
3093@c man end
3094@end ifset
3095
252b5132
RH
3096@ifset UsesEnvVars
3097@node Environment
3098@section Environment Variables
3099
0285c67d
NC
3100@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3101
560e09e9 3102You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3103@ifclear SingleFormat
3104@code{GNUTARGET},
3105@end ifclear
3106@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3107
36f63dca 3108@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3109@kindex GNUTARGET
3110@cindex default input format
3111@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3112use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3113of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3114@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3115of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3116attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3117this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3118there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3119object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3120BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3121in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3122@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3123
3124@kindex LDEMULATION
3125@cindex default emulation
3126@cindex emulation, default
3127@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3128@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3129behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3130available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3131the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3132variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3133linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3134
3135@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3136@cindex demangling, default
3137Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3138@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3139default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3140a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3141may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3142options.
3143
0285c67d
NC
3144@c man end
3145@end ifset
3146
252b5132
RH
3147@node Scripts
3148@chapter Linker Scripts
3149
3150@cindex scripts
3151@cindex linker scripts
3152@cindex command files
3153Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3154written in the linker command language.
3155
3156The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3157the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3158the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3159more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3160direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3161described below.
3162
3163The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3164yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3165linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3166to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3167such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3168
3169You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3170line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3171default linker script.
3172
3173You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3174to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3175Linker Scripts}.
3176
3177@menu
3178* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3179* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3180* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3181* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3182* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3183* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3184* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3185* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3186* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3187* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3188* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3189@end menu
3190
3191@node Basic Script Concepts
3192@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3193@cindex linker script concepts
3194We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3195describe the linker script language.
3196
3197The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3198file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3199@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3200The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3201purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3202among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3203section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3204in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3205
3206Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3207also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3208contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3209the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3210A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3211area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3212loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3213which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3214of debugging information.
3215
3216Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3217first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3218the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3219@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3220section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3221same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3222is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3223(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3224based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3225RAM address would be the VMA.
3226
3227You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3228program with the @samp{-h} option.
3229
3230Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3231@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3232has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3233information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3234will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3235static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3236referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3237
3238You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3239program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3240option.
3241
3242@node Script Format
3243@section Linker Script Format
3244@cindex linker script format
3245Linker scripts are text files.
3246
3247You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3248either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3249symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3250generally ignored.
3251
3252Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3253If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3254otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3255double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3256file name.
3257
3258You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3259@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3260to whitespace.
3261
3262@node Simple Example
3263@section Simple Linker Script Example
3264@cindex linker script example
3265@cindex example of linker script
3266Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3267
3268The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3269@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3270memory layout of the output file.
3271
3272The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3273describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3274code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3275@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3276Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3277your input files.
3278
3279For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32800x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3281linker script which will do that:
3282@smallexample
3283SECTIONS
3284@{
3285 . = 0x10000;
3286 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3287 . = 0x8000000;
3288 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3289 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3290@}
3291@end smallexample
3292
3293You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3294followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3295descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3296
252b5132
RH
3297The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3298sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3299counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3300other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3301current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3302incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3303@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3304
3305The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3306required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3307after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3308which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3309wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3310means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3311
3312Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3313@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3314@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3315
3316The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3317the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3318at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3319output section, the value of the location counter will be
3320@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3321effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3322immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3323
3324The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3325alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3326example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3327sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3328may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3329sections.
3330
3331That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3332
3333@node Simple Commands
3334@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3335@cindex linker script simple commands
3336In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3337
3338@menu
3339* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3340* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3341@ifclear SingleFormat
3342* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3343@end ifclear
3344
4a93e180 3345* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3346* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3347@end menu
3348
3349@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3350@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3351@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3352@cindex start of execution
3353@cindex first instruction
3354@cindex entry point
3355The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3356point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3357entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3358@smallexample
3359ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3360@end smallexample
3361
3362There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3363entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3364stopping when one of them succeeds:
3365@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3366@item
252b5132 3367the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3368@item
252b5132 3369the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3370@item
3ab904c4
NC
3371the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3372targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3373check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3374@item
252b5132 3375the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3376@item
252b5132
RH
3377The address @code{0}.
3378@end itemize
3379
3380@node File Commands
36f63dca 3381@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3382@cindex linker script file commands
3383Several linker script commands deal with files.
3384
3385@table @code
3386@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3387@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3388@cindex including a linker script
3389Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3390be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3391with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
339210 levels deep.
3393
4006703d
NS
3394You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3395@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3396
252b5132
RH
3397@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3398@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3399@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3400@cindex input files in linker scripts
3401@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3402@cindex linker script input object files
3403The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3404in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3405
3406For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3407a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3408then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3409
3410In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3411script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3412
e3f2db7f
AO
3413In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3414with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3415located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3416for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3417open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3418linker will search through the archive library search path.
3419The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3420as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3421path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3422@ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3423
ff5dcc92 3424If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3425name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3426@samp{-l}.
3427
3428When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3429files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3430script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3431
3432@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3433@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3434@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3435@cindex grouping input files
3436The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3437files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3438new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3439in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3440
b717d30e
JJ
3441@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3442@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3443@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3444This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3445commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3446as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3447with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3448when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3449@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3450and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3451setting afterwards.
3452
252b5132
RH
3453@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3454@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3455@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3456The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3457@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3458@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3459Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3460precedence.
3461
3462You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3463output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3464
3465@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3466@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3467@cindex library search path in linker script
3468@cindex archive search path in linker script
3469@cindex search path in linker script
3470The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3471@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3472@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3473on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3474are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3475the command line option are searched first.
3476
3477@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3478@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3479@cindex first input file
3480The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3481that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3482though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3483when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3484first file.
3485@end table
3486
3487@ifclear SingleFormat
3488@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3489@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3490A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3491
3492@table @code
3493@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3494@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3495@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3496@cindex output file format in linker script
3497The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3498output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3499exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3500(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3501line option takes precedence.
3502
3503You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3504formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3505This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3506desired endianness.
3507
3508If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3509will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3510output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3511used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3512
3513For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3514command:
3515@smallexample
3516OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3517@end smallexample
3518This says that the default format for the output file is
3519@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3520option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3521format.
3522
3523@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3524@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3525@cindex input file format in linker script
3526The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3527files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3528This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3529(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3530is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3531command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3532@end table
3533@end ifclear
3534
4a93e180
NC
3535@node REGION_ALIAS
3536@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3537@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3538@cindex region alias
3539@cindex region names
3540
3541Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3542@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3543
3544@smallexample
3545REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3546@end smallexample
3547
3548The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3549memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3550to memory regions. An example follows.
3551
3552Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3553memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3554that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3555non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3556access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3557read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3558sections:
3559
3560@itemize @bullet
3561@item
3562@code{.text} program code;
3563@item
3564@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3565@item
3566@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3567@item
3568@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3569@end itemize
3570
3571The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3572part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3573output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3574systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3575@code{C}:
3576@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3577@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3578@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3579@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3580@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3581@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3582@end multitable
3583The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3584loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3585the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3586the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3587
3588The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3589includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3590memory layout:
3591@smallexample
3592INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3593
3594SECTIONS
3595 @{
3596 .text :
3597 @{
3598 *(.text)
3599 @} > REGION_TEXT
3600 .rodata :
3601 @{
3602 *(.rodata)
3603 rodata_end = .;
3604 @} > REGION_RODATA
3605 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3606 @{
3607 data_start = .;
3608 *(.data)
3609 @} > REGION_DATA
3610 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3611 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3612 .bss :
3613 @{
3614 *(.bss)
3615 @} > REGION_BSS
3616 @}
3617@end smallexample
3618
3619Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3620regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3621variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3622@table @code
3623@item A
3624Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3625@smallexample
3626MEMORY
3627 @{
3628 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3629 @}
3630
3631REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3632REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3633REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3634REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3635@end smallexample
3636@item B
3637Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3638into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3639@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3640@smallexample
3641MEMORY
3642 @{
3643 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3644 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3645 @}
3646
3647REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3648REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3649REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3650REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3651@end smallexample
3652@item C
3653Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3654@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3655initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3656system start into the @code{RAM}.
3657@smallexample
3658MEMORY
3659 @{
3660 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3661 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3662 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3663 @}
3664
3665REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3666REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3667REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3668REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3669@end smallexample
3670@end table
3671
3672It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3673@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3674necessary:
3675@smallexample
3676#include <string.h>
3677
3678extern char data_start [];
3679extern char data_size [];
3680extern char data_load_start [];
3681
3682void copy_data(void)
3683@{
3684 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3685 @{
3686 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3687 @}
3688@}
3689@end smallexample
3690
252b5132 3691@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3692@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3693There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3694
3695@table @code
3696@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3697@kindex ASSERT
3698@cindex assertion in linker script
3699Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3700with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3701
fd1c4238
NC
3702Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3703take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3704inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3705for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3706symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3707
3708@smallexample
3709 .stack :
3710 @{
3711 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3712 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3713 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3714 @}
3715@end smallexample
3716
3717will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3718PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3719can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3720
3721@smallexample
3722 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3723 .stack :
3724 @{
3725 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3726 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3727 @}
3728@end smallexample
3729
3730will work.
3731
252b5132
RH
3732@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3733@kindex EXTERN
3734@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3735Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3736symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3737modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3738each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3739command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3740
3741@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3742@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3743@cindex common allocation in linker script
3744This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3745to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3746output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3747
4818e05f
AM
3748@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3749@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3750@cindex common allocation in linker script
3751This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3752command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3753to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3754
7bdf4127
AB
3755@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3756@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3757@cindex group allocation in linker script
3758@cindex section groups
3759@cindex COMDAT
3760This command has the same effect as the
3761@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3762@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3763and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3764specified (@samp{-r}).
3765
53d25da6
AM
3766@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3767@kindex INSERT
3768@cindex insert user script into default script
3769This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3770augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3771inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3772@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3773default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3774sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3775linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3776insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3777linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3778default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3779of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3780to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3781is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3782
3783@smallexample
3784SECTIONS
3785@{
3786 OVERLAY :
3787 @{
3788 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3789 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3790 @}
3791@}
3792INSERT AFTER .text;
3793@end smallexample
3794
252b5132
RH
3795@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3796@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3797@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3798This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3799references among certain output sections.
3800
3801In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3802using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3803will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3804errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3805a function defined in the other section.
3806
3807The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3808@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3809an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3810@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3811names.
3812
cdf96953
MF
3813@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3814@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3815@cindex cross references
3816This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3817references to one section from a list of other sections.
3818
3819The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3820output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3821a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3822there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3823must never call back.
3824
3825The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3826The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3827If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3828the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3829status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3830names, not input section names.
3831
252b5132
RH
3832@ifclear SingleFormat
3833@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3834@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3835@cindex machine architecture
3836@cindex architecture
3837Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3838of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3839architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3840the @samp{-f} option.
3841@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3842
3843@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3844@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3845This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3846@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3847in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3848@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3849@end table
3850
3851@node Assignments
3852@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3853@cindex assignment in scripts
3854@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3855@cindex variables, defining
3856You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3857the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3858
3859@menu
3860* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3861* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3862* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3863* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3864* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3865@end menu
3866
3867@node Simple Assignments
3868@subsection Simple Assignments
3869
3870You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3871
3872@table @code
3873@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3874@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3875@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3876@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3877@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3878@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3879@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3880@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3881@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3882@end table
3883
3884The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3885@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3886defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3887
3888The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3889may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3890
3891The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3892
3893Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3894
3895You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3896statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3897section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3898
3899The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3900expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3901
3902Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3903assignments may be used:
3904
3905@smallexample
3906floating_point = 0;
3907SECTIONS
3908@{
3909 .text :
3910 @{
3911 *(.text)
3912 _etext = .;
3913 @}
156e34dd 3914 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3915 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3916@}
3917@end smallexample
3918@noindent
3919In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3920zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3921the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3922defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3923upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3924
eb8476a6
MR
3925@node HIDDEN
3926@subsection HIDDEN
3927@cindex HIDDEN
3928For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3929exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3930
3931Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3932@code{HIDDEN}:
3933
3934@smallexample
3935HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3936SECTIONS
3937@{
3938 .text :
3939 @{
3940 *(.text)
3941 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3942 @}
3943 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3944 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3945@}
3946@end smallexample
3947@noindent
3948In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3949
252b5132
RH
3950@node PROVIDE
3951@subsection PROVIDE
3952@cindex PROVIDE
3953In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3954only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3955the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3956@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3957@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3958@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3959@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3960@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3961
3962Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3963@smallexample
3964SECTIONS
3965@{
3966 .text :
3967 @{
3968 *(.text)
3969 _etext = .;
3970 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3971 @}
3972@}
3973@end smallexample
3974
3975In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3976underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3977the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3978underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3979If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3980linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3981
7af8e998
L
3982@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3983@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3984@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3985Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3986hidden and won't be exported.
3987
73ae6183
NC
3988@node Source Code Reference
3989@subsection Source Code Reference
3990
3991Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3992intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3993a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3994symbol that does not have a value.
3995
3996Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3997transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3998stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3999prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4000mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4001of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4002variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4003linker script variable might be referred to as:
4004
4005@smallexample
4006 extern int foo;
4007@end smallexample
4008
4009But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4010
4011@smallexample
4012 _foo = 1000;
4013@end smallexample
4014
4015In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4016transformation has taken place.
4017
4018When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4019things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4020in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4021second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4022table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4023contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4024value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4025
4026@smallexample
4027 int foo = 1000;
4028@end smallexample
4029
10bf6894 4030creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4031holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4032number 1000 is initially stored.
4033
4034When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4035first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4036memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4037So:
4038
4039@smallexample
4040 foo = 1;
4041@end smallexample
4042
4043looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4044associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4045address. Whereas:
4046
4047@smallexample
4048 int * a = & foo;
4049@end smallexample
4050
10bf6894 4051looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4052and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4053the variable @samp{a}.
4054
4055Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4056the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4057an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4058
4059@smallexample
4060 foo = 1000;
4061@end smallexample
4062
4063creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4064the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4065address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4066linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4067access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4068
4069Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4070you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4071use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4072section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4073linker script contains these declarations:
4074
4075@smallexample
4076@group
4077 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4078 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4079 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4080@end group
4081@end smallexample
4082
4083Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4084
4085@smallexample
4086@group
4087 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4088
73ae6183
NC
4089 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4090@end group
4091@end smallexample
4092
4093Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4094Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4095arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4096
4097@smallexample
4098@group
4099 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4100
4101 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4102@end group
4103@end smallexample
4104
4105Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4106operators.
73ae6183 4107
252b5132 4108@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4109@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4110@kindex SECTIONS
4111The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4112into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4113
4114The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4115@smallexample
4116SECTIONS
4117@{
4118 @var{sections-command}
4119 @var{sections-command}
4120 @dots{}
4121@}
4122@end smallexample
4123
4124Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4125
4126@itemize @bullet
4127@item
4128an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4129@item
4130a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4131@item
4132an output section description
4133@item
4134an overlay description
4135@end itemize
4136
4137The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4138@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4139those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4140understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4141the layout of the output file.
4142
4143Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4144below.
4145
4146If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4147linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4148section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4149input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4150example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4151in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4152
4153@menu
4154* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4155* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4156* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4157* Input Section:: Input section description
4158* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4159* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4160* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4161* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4162* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4163@end menu
4164
4165@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4166@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4167The full description of an output section looks like this:
4168@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4169@group
7e7d5768 4170@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4171 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4172 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4173 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4174 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4175 @{
4176 @var{output-section-command}
4177 @var{output-section-command}
4178 @dots{}
abc9061b 4179 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4180@end group
4181@end smallexample
4182
4183Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4184
4185The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4186name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4187The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4188the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4189The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4190
4191Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4192
4193@itemize @bullet
4194@item
4195a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4196@item
4197an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4198@item
4199data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4200@item
4201a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4202@end itemize
4203
4204@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4205@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4206@cindex name, section
4207@cindex section name
4208The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4209meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4210support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4211must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4212example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4213output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4214names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4215quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4216characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4217commas must be quoted.
4218
4219The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4220Discarding}.
4221
4222@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4223@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4224@cindex address, section
4225@cindex section address
4226The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4227address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4228is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4229
4230If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4231section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4232to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4233alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4234contained within the output section.
4235
4236The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4237
4238@itemize @bullet
4239@item
4240If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4241is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4242in that region.
4243
4244@item
4245If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4246regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4247section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4248be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4249
4250@item
4251If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4252the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4253counter.
4254@end itemize
4255
4256@noindent
4257For example:
4258
252b5132
RH
4259@smallexample
4260.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4261@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4262
252b5132
RH
4263@noindent
4264and
ea5cae92 4265
252b5132
RH
4266@smallexample
4267.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4268@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4269
252b5132
RH
4270@noindent
4271are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4272@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4273counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4274counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4275input sections.
252b5132
RH
4276
4277The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4278For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4279so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4280do something like this:
4281@smallexample
4282.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4283@end smallexample
4284@noindent
4285This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4286aligned upward to the specified value.
4287
4288Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4289location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4290sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4291
4292@node Input Section
36f63dca 4293@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4294@cindex input sections
4295@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4296The most common output section command is an input section description.
4297
4298The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4299You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4300in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4301map the input files into your memory layout.
4302
4303@menu
4304* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4305* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4306* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4307* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4308* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4309@end menu
4310
4311@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4312@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4313@cindex input section basics
4314An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4315by a list of section names in parentheses.
4316
4317The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4318describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4319
4320The most common input section description is to include all input
4321sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4322include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4323@smallexample
4324*(.text)
4325@end smallexample
4326@noindent
18625d54 4327Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4328@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4329of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4330match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4331example:
252b5132 4332@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4333EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4334@end smallexample
4335@noindent
4336will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4337and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4338placed inside the section list, for example:
4339@smallexample
b4346c09 4340*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4341@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4342@noindent
4343The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4344two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4345more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4346
4347There are two ways to include more than one section:
4348@smallexample
4349*(.text .rdata)
4350*(.text) *(.rdata)
4351@end smallexample
4352@noindent
4353The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4354@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4355first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4356they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4357@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4358@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4359
8f1732fc
AB
4360When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4361is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4362immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4363@smallexample
4364*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4365@end smallexample
4366@noindent
4367will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4368@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4369from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4370exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4371could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4372@smallexample
4373*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4374@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4375@noindent
4376Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4377before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4378all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4379@smallexample
4380EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4381@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4382
252b5132
RH
4383You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4384You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4385needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4386@smallexample
4387data.o(.data)
4388@end smallexample
4389
ae17ab41
CM
4390To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4391of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4392
4393Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4394
4395@smallexample
4396@group
4397SECTIONS @{
4398 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4399 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4400@}
4401@end group
4402@end smallexample
4403
4404In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4405input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4406@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4407@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4408whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4409
967928e9
AM
4410You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4411matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4412with no whitespace around the colon.
4413
4414@table @samp
4415@item archive:file
4416matches file within archive
4417@item archive:
4418matches the whole archive
4419@item :file
4420matches file but not one in an archive
4421@end table
4422
4423Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4424wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4425single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4426@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4427within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4428also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4429other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4430from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4431command.
4432
252b5132
RH
4433If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4434the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4435commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4436@smallexample
4437data.o
4438@end smallexample
4439
967928e9
AM
4440When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4441and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4442characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4443name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4444did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4445though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4446@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4447the archive search path.
4448
4449@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4450@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4451@cindex input section wildcards
4452@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4453@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4454@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4455In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4456name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4457
4458The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4459pattern for the file name.
4460
4461The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4462
4463@table @samp
4464@item *
4465matches any number of characters
4466@item ?
4467matches any single character
4468@item [@var{chars}]
4469matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4470character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4471@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4472@item \
4473quotes the following character
4474@end table
4475
4476When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4477will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4478Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4479exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4480@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4481a @samp{/} character.
4482
4483File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4484specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4485does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4486
4487If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4488appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4489will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4490sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4491@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4492@smallexample
4493.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4494.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4495@end smallexample
4496
bcaa7b3e 4497@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4498Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4499in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4500this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4501pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4502@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4503into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4504
bcaa7b3e
L
4505@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4506@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4507difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4508descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4509Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4510reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4511
02ecc8e9
L
4512@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4513@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4514difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4515ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4516encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4517
bcaa7b3e
L
4518@cindex SORT
4519@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4520
4521When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4522can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4523
4524@enumerate
4525@item
4526@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4527It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4528sections have the same name.
4529@item
4530@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4531It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4532sections have the same alignment.
4533@item
c0065db7 4534@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4535treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4536@item
4537@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4538is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4539@item
4540All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4541@end enumerate
4542
4543When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4544section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4545takes precedence over the command line option.
4546
4547If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4548command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4549treated as nested sorting command.
4550
4551@enumerate
4552@item
4553@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4554@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4555@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4556@item
4557@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4558@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4559@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4560@end enumerate
4561
4562If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4563command line option will be ignored.
4564
eda680f8
L
4565@cindex SORT_NONE
4566@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4567section sorting option.
4568
252b5132
RH
4569If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4570@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4571precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4572
4573This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4574files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4575sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4576The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4577with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4578linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4579@smallexample
4580@group
4581SECTIONS @{
4582 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4583 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4584 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4585 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4586@}
4587@end group
4588@end smallexample
4589
4590@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4591@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4592@cindex common symbol placement
4593@cindex uninitialized data placement
4594A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4595file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4596linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4597named @samp{COMMON}.
4598
4599You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4600other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4601particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4602input files are placed in another section.
4603
4604In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4605@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4606@smallexample
4607.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4608@end smallexample
4609
4610@cindex scommon section
4611@cindex small common symbols
4612Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4613example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4614symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4615different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4616the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4617symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4618to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4619locations.
4620
4621@cindex [COMMON]
4622You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4623notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4624@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4625
4626@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4627@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4628@cindex KEEP
4629@cindex garbage collection
4630When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4631it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4632This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4633with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4634@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4635
4636@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4637@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4638The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4639to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4640start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4641@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4642follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4643@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4644@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4645All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4646files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4647
4648@smallexample
4649@group
4650SECTIONS @{
4651 outputa 0x10000 :
4652 @{
4653 all.o
4654 foo.o (.input1)
4655 @}
36f63dca
NC
4656@end group
4657@group
252b5132
RH
4658 outputb :
4659 @{
4660 foo.o (.input2)
4661 foo1.o (.input1)
4662 @}
36f63dca
NC
4663@end group
4664@group
252b5132
RH
4665 outputc :
4666 @{
4667 *(.input1)
4668 *(.input2)
4669 @}
4670@}
4671@end group
a1ab1d2a 4672@end smallexample
252b5132 4673
cbd0eecf
L
4674If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4675and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4676automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4677__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4678indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4679respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4680C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4681
252b5132 4682@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4683@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4684@cindex data
4685@cindex section data
4686@cindex output section data
4687@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4688@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4689@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4690@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4691@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4692You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4693@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4694an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4695parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4696value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4697counter.
4698
4699The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4700store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4701bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4702stored.
4703
4704For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4705of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4706@smallexample
4707BYTE(1)
4708LONG(addr)
4709@end smallexample
4710
4711When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4712same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4713target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4714@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4715@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4716
4717If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4718which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4719When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4720true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4721endianness of the first input object file.
4722
36f63dca 4723Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4724between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4725@smallexample
4726SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4727@end smallexample
4728whereas this will work:
4729@smallexample
4730SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4731@end smallexample
4732
252b5132
RH
4733@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4734@cindex holes, filling
4735@cindex unspecified memory
4736You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4737current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4738otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4739gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4740with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4741necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4742point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4743than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4744different parts of an output section.
4745
4746This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4747value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4748@smallexample
563e308f 4749FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4750@end smallexample
4751
4752The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4753section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4754part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4755entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4756precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4757expression.
252b5132
RH
4758
4759@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4760@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4761There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4762commands.
4763
4764@table @code
4765@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4766@cindex input filename symbols
4767@cindex filename symbols
4768@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4769The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4770The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4771file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4772the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4773
4774This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4775normally used for any other object file format.
4776
4777@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4778@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4779@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4780@item CONSTRUCTORS
4781When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4782unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4783destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4784arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4785automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4786For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4787linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4788@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4789ignored for other object file formats.
4790
4791The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4792constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4793Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4794the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4795first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4796of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4797compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4798formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4799@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4800the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4801destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4802@code{exit}.
4803
4804For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4805arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4806addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4807and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4808linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4809runtime code expects to see.
4810
4811@smallexample
4812 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4813 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4814 *(.ctors)
4815 LONG(0)
4816 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4817 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4818 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4819 *(.dtors)
4820 LONG(0)
4821 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4822@end smallexample
4823
4824If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4825which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4826are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4827are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4828command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4829@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4830@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4831@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4832
4833Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4834and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4835need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4836scripts.
4837
4838@end table
4839
4840@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4841@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4842@cindex discarding sections
4843@cindex sections, discarding
4844@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4845The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4846This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4847may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4848@smallexample
49c13adb 4849.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4850@end smallexample
4851@noindent
4852will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4853@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4854sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4855space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4856too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4857space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4858@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4859@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4860This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4861
a0976ea4 4862The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4863on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4864symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4865the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4866section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4867
4868@cindex /DISCARD/
4869The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4870input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4871section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4872
4873@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4874@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4875@cindex output section attributes
4876We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4877like this:
0c71d759 4878
252b5132 4879@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4880@group
7e7d5768 4881@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4882 [AT(@var{lma})]
4883 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4884 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4885 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4886 @{
4887 @var{output-section-command}
4888 @var{output-section-command}
4889 @dots{}
562d3460 4890 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4891@end group
4892@end smallexample
0c71d759 4893
252b5132
RH
4894We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4895@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4896remaining section attributes.
4897
a1ab1d2a 4898@menu
252b5132
RH
4899* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4900* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4901* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4902* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4903* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4904* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4905* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4906* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4907@end menu
4908
4909@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4910@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4911Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4912parentheses. The following types are defined:
4913
4914@table @code
4915@item NOLOAD
4916The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4917loaded into memory when the program is run.
4918@item DSECT
4919@itemx COPY
4920@itemx INFO
4921@itemx OVERLAY
4922These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4923rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4924marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4925section when the program is run.
4926@end table
4927
4928@kindex NOLOAD
4929@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4930@cindex loading, preventing
4931The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4932the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4933the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4934@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4935need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4936@smallexample
4937@group
4938SECTIONS @{
4939 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4940 @dots{}
4941@}
4942@end group
4943@end smallexample
4944
4945@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4946@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4947@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4948@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4949@cindex load address
4950@cindex section load address
4951Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4952@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4953@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4954specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4955address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4956
ea5cae92
NC
4957The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4958specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4959takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4960load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4961region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4962
4963If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4964section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4965load address:
4966
4967@itemize @bullet
4968@item
4969If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4970the LMA address as well.
4971
4972@item
4973If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4974
4975@item
4976Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4977with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4978section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4979VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4980the last section in the located region.
4981
4982@item
4983If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4984that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4985
4986@item
4987If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4988section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4989@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4990
4991@cindex ROM initialized data
4992@cindex initialized data in ROM
4993This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4994example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4995called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4996@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4997even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4998uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4999defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5000counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5001
5002@smallexample
5003@group
5004SECTIONS
5005 @{
5006 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5007 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5008 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5009 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5010 .bss 0x3000 :
5011 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5012@}
5013@end group
5014@end smallexample
5015
5016The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5017this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5018the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5019how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5020script.
5021
5022@smallexample
5023@group
5024extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5025char *src = &_etext;
5026char *dst = &_data;
5027
ea5cae92
NC
5028/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5029while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5030 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5031
ea5cae92 5032/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5033for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5034 *dst = 0;
5035@end group
5036@end smallexample
5037
bbf115d3
L
5038@node Forced Output Alignment
5039@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5040@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5041@cindex forcing output section alignment
5042@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5043You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5044alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5045intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5046
7e7d5768
AM
5047@node Forced Input Alignment
5048@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5049@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5050@cindex forcing input section alignment
5051@cindex input section alignment
5052You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5053SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5054sections, whether larger or smaller.
5055
0c71d759
NC
5056@node Output Section Constraint
5057@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5058@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5059@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5060@cindex constraints on output sections
5061You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5062of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5063read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5064@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5065
252b5132 5066@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5067@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5068@kindex >@var{region}
5069@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5070@cindex memory regions and sections
5071You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5072using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5073
5074Here is a simple example:
5075@smallexample
5076@group
5077MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5078SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5079@end group
5080@end smallexample
5081
5082@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5083@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5084@kindex :@var{phdr}
5085@cindex section, assigning to program header
5086@cindex program headers and sections
5087You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5088using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5089one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5090assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5091@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5092linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5093
5094Here is a simple example:
5095@smallexample
5096@group
5097PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5098SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5099@end group
5100@end smallexample
5101
5102@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5103@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5104@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5105@cindex section fill pattern
5106@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5107You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5108@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5109(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5110within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5111alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5112necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5113of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5114an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5115fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5116other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5117pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5118expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5119
5120You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5121output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5122
5123Here is a simple example:
5124@smallexample
5125@group
563e308f 5126SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5127@end group
5128@end smallexample
5129
5130@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5131@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5132@kindex OVERLAY
5133@cindex overlays
5134An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5135are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5136the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5137copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5138required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5139can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5140than another.
5141
5142Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5143@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5144output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5145command is as follows:
5146@smallexample
5147@group
5148OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5149 @{
5150 @var{secname1}
5151 @{
5152 @var{output-section-command}
5153 @var{output-section-command}
5154 @dots{}
5155 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5156 @var{secname2}
5157 @{
5158 @var{output-section-command}
5159 @var{output-section-command}
5160 @dots{}
5161 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5162 @dots{}
abc9061b 5163 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5164@end group
5165@end smallexample
5166
5167Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5168section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5169section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5170those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5171except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5172sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5173
abc9061b
CC
5174The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5175the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5176
252b5132
RH
5177The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5178addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5179memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5180whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5181and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5182and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5183
56dd11f0
NC
5184If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5185references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5186the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5187sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5188@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5189
5190For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5191provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5192defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5193@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5194the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5195within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5196symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5197
5198At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5199the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5200
5201Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5202@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5203@smallexample
5204@group
5205 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5206 @{
5207 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5208 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5209 @}
5210@end group
5211@end smallexample
5212@noindent
5213This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5214address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5215@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5216following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5217@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5218@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5219
5220C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5221like the following.
5222
5223@smallexample
5224@group
5225 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5226 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5227 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5228@end group
5229@end smallexample
5230
5231Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5232everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5233example could have been written identically as follows.
5234
5235@smallexample
5236@group
5237 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5238 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5239 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5240 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5241 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5242 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5243 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5244@end group
5245@end smallexample
5246
5247@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5248@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5249@kindex MEMORY
5250@cindex memory regions
5251@cindex regions of memory
5252@cindex allocating memory
5253@cindex discontinuous memory
5254The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5255memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5256
5257The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5258memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5259may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5260can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5261set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5262regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5263around to fit into the available regions.
5264
127fcdff
AB
5265A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5266however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5267specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5268@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5269@smallexample
5270@group
a1ab1d2a 5271MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5272 @{
5273 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5274 @dots{}
5275 @}
5276@end group
5277@end smallexample
5278
5279The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5280region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5281Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5282with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5283must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5284add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5285command.
252b5132
RH
5286
5287@cindex memory region attributes
5288The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5289whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5290not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5291@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5292section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5293the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5294them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5295
5296The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5297@table @samp
5298@item R
5299Read-only section
5300@item W
5301Read/write section
5302@item X
5303Executable section
5304@item A
5305Allocatable section
5306@item I
5307Initialized section
5308@item L
5309Same as @samp{I}
5310@item !
c09e9a8c 5311Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5312@end table
5313
5314If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5315@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5316attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5317in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5318attributes.
5319
5320@kindex ORIGIN =
5321@kindex o =
5322@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5323The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5324the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5325cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5326abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5327@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5328
5329@kindex LENGTH =
5330@kindex len =
5331@kindex l =
5332The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5333region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5334be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5335@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5336
5337In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5338available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5339and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5340linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5341is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5342or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5343explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5344region.
5345
5346@smallexample
5347@group
a1ab1d2a 5348MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5349 @{
5350 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5351 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5352 @}
5353@end group
5354@end smallexample
5355
5356Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5357specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5358@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5359a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5360output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5361was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5362the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5363output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5364region, the linker will issue an error message.
5365
3ec57632 5366It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5367expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5368@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5369
5370@smallexample
5371@group
c0065db7 5372 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5373@end group
5374@end smallexample
5375
252b5132
RH
5376@node PHDRS
5377@section PHDRS Command
5378@kindex PHDRS
5379@cindex program headers
5380@cindex ELF program headers
5381@cindex program segments
5382@cindex segments, ELF
5383The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5384@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5385loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5386program with the @samp{-p} option.
5387
5388When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5389reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5390program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5391This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5392interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5393
5394The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5395in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5396precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5397the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5398not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5399
5400The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5401generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5402ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5403
5404This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5405@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5406
5407@smallexample
5408@group
5409PHDRS
5410@{
5411 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5412 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5413@}
5414@end group
5415@end smallexample
5416
5417The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5418of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5419header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5420with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5421must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5422is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5423
5424Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5425system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5426specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5427sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5428attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5429Section Phdr}.
5430
5431It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5432merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5433repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5434contain the section.
5435
5436If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5437then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5438not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5439convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5440placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5441default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5442segment at all.
5443
5444@kindex FILEHDR
5445@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5446You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5447the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5448The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5449file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5450include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5451segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5452these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5453
5454The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5455value of the keyword.
5456
5457@table @asis
5458@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5459Indicates an unused program header.
5460
5461@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5462Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5463the file.
5464
5465@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5466Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5467
5468@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5469Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5470found.
5471
5472@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5473Indicates a segment holding note information.
5474
5475@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5476A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5477ABI.
5478
5479@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5480Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5481
1a9ccd70
NC
5482@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5483Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5484
252b5132
RH
5485@item @var{expression}
5486An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5487be used for types not defined above.
5488@end table
5489
5490You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5491in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5492@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5493Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5494output section attribute.
5495
5496The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5497which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5498explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5499an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5500header.
5501
5502Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5503headers used on a native ELF system.
5504
5505@example
5506@group
5507PHDRS
5508@{
5509 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5510 interp PT_INTERP ;
5511 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5512 data PT_LOAD ;
5513 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5514@}
5515
5516SECTIONS
5517@{
5518 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5519 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5520 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5521 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5522 @dots{}
5523 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5524 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5525 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5526 @dots{}
5527@}
5528@end group
5529@end example
5530
5531@node VERSION
5532@section VERSION Command
5533@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5534@cindex symbol versions
5535@cindex version script
5536@cindex versions of symbols
5537The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5538only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5539symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5540a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5541shared library.
5542
5543You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5544you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5545also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5546
5547The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5548@smallexample
5549VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5550@end smallexample
5551
5552The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5553Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5554version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5555version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5556version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5557scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5558library.
5559
5560The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5561examples.
5562
5563@smallexample
5564VERS_1.1 @{
5565 global:
5566 foo1;
5567 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5568 old*;
5569 original*;
5570 new*;
252b5132
RH
5571@};
5572
5573VERS_1.2 @{
5574 foo2;
5575@} VERS_1.1;
5576
5577VERS_2.0 @{
5578 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5579 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5580 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5581 "f(int, double)";
5582 @};
252b5132
RH
5583@} VERS_1.2;
5584@end smallexample
5585
5586This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5587version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5588The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5589a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5590of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5591symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5592is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5593in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5594However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5595name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5596
5597Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5598depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5599to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5600
5601Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5602depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5603and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5604
5605When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5606specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5607unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5608unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5609somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5610wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5611wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5612set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5613ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5614
5615The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5616they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5617could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5618However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5619
0f6bf451 5620Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5621in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5622symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5623won't.
5624
5625@smallexample
7c9c73be 5626@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5627@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5628
252b5132
RH
5629When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5630symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5631requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5632shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5633loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5634linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5635application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5636way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5637all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5638search for each symbol reference.
5639
5640The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5641doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5642that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5643functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5644the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5645required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5646that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5647versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5648the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5649
5650There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5651first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5652source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5653script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5654maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5655@smallexample
5656__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5657@end smallexample
5658@noindent
5659in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5660be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5661The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5662@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5663takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5664
5665The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5666function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5667an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5668version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5669linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5670
5671To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5672source file. Here is an example:
5673
5674@smallexample
5675__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5676__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5677__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5678__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5679@end smallexample
5680
5681In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5682unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5683example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5684@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5685
5686When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5687some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5688this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5689@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5690declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5691you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5692
5693If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5694within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5695(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5696specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5697
cb840a31
L
5698You can also specify the language in the version script:
5699
5700@smallexample
5701VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5702@end smallexample
5703
c0065db7 5704The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5705The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5706demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5707patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5708@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5709
86043bbb
MM
5710Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5711described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5712or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5713the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5714whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5715cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5716might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5717should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5718expect when you upgrade.
5719
252b5132
RH
5720@node Expressions
5721@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5722@cindex expressions
5723@cindex arithmetic
5724The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5725that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5726expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5727host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5728
5729You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5730
5731The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5732expressions.
5733
5734@menu
5735* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5736* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5737* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5738* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5739* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5740* Operators:: Operators
5741* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5742* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5743* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5744@end menu
5745
5746@node Constants
5747@subsection Constants
5748@cindex integer notation
5749@cindex constants in linker scripts
5750All constants are integers.
5751
5752As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5753octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5754hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5755@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5756@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5757value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5758
5759@cindex scaled integers
5760@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5761@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5762@cindex suffixes for integers
5763@cindex integer suffixes
5764In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5765constant by
5766@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5767@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5768@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5769@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5770@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5771@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5772@tex
5773${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5774@end tex
5775@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5776respectively. For example, the following
5777all refer to the same quantity:
5778
252b5132 5779@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5780_fourk_1 = 4K;
5781_fourk_2 = 4096;
5782_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5783_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5784@end smallexample
5785
8a308ae8
NC
5786Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5787conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5788
0c71d759
NC
5789@node Symbolic Constants
5790@subsection Symbolic Constants
5791@cindex symbolic constants
5792@kindex CONSTANT
5793It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5794the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5795
5796@table @code
5797@item MAXPAGESIZE
5798@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5799The target's maximum page size.
5800
5801@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5802@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5803The target's default page size.
5804@end table
5805
5806So for example:
5807
5808@smallexample
9d5777a3 5809 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5810@end smallexample
5811
5812will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5813supported by the target.
5814
252b5132
RH
5815@node Symbols
5816@subsection Symbol Names
5817@cindex symbol names
5818@cindex names
5819@cindex quoted symbol names
5820@kindex "
5821Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5822and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5823Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5824specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5825keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5826@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5827"SECTION" = 9;
5828"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5829@end smallexample
5830
5831Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5832to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5833whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5834
ecca9871
L
5835@node Orphan Sections
5836@subsection Orphan Sections
5837@cindex orphan
5838Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5839are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5840script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5841output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5842in which to place the orphaned input section.
5843
5844If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5845an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5846placed at the end of that output section.
5847
5848If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5849sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5850name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5851orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5852one new output section.
5853
5854If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5855then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5856in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5857linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5858attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5859sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5860support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5861
c005eb9e
AB
5862The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5863(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5864output sections an orphan is placed in.
5865
252b5132
RH
5866@node Location Counter
5867@subsection The Location Counter
5868@kindex .
5869@cindex dot
5870@cindex location counter
5871@cindex current output location
5872The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5873current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5874location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5875within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5876anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5877
5878@cindex holes
5879Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5880moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5881location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5882and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5883doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5884
5885@smallexample
5886SECTIONS
5887@{
5888 output :
5889 @{
5890 file1(.text)
5891 . = . + 1000;
5892 file2(.text)
5893 . += 1000;
5894 file3(.text)
563e308f 5895 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5896@}
5897@end smallexample
5898@noindent
5899In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5900located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5901followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5902@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5903@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5904specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5905
5c6bbab8
NC
5906@cindex dot inside sections
5907Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5908current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5909statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5910absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5911however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5912not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5913
5914@smallexample
5915SECTIONS
5916@{
5917 . = 0x100
5918 .text: @{
5919 *(.text)
5920 . = 0x200
5921 @}
5922 . = 0x500
5923 .data: @{
5924 *(.data)
5925 . += 0x600
5926 @}
5927@}
5928@end smallexample
5929
5930The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5931and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5932the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5933much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5934move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5935and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5936the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5937the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5938
b5666f2f
AM
5939@cindex dot outside sections
5940Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5941output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5942needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5943
5944@smallexample
5945SECTIONS
5946@{
5947 start_of_text = . ;
5948 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5949 end_of_text = . ;
5950
5951 start_of_data = . ;
5952 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5953 end_of_data = . ;
5954@}
5955@end smallexample
5956
5957If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5958not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5959between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5960should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5961blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5962the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5963sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5964statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5965special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5966place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5967as follows:
5968
5969@smallexample
5970SECTIONS
5971@{
5972 start_of_text = . ;
5973 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5974 end_of_text = . ;
5975
5976 start_of_data = . ;
5977 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5978 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5979 end_of_data = . ;
5980@}
5981@end smallexample
5982
5983This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5984@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5985placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5986assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5987a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5988section. So you could write:
5989
5990@smallexample
5991SECTIONS
5992@{
5993 start_of_text = . ;
5994 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5995 end_of_text = . ;
5996
5997 . = . ;
5998 start_of_data = . ;
5999 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6000 end_of_data = . ;
6001@}
6002@end smallexample
6003
6004Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6005@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6006
252b5132
RH
6007@need 2000
6008@node Operators
6009@subsection Operators
6010@cindex operators for arithmetic
6011@cindex arithmetic operators
6012@cindex precedence in expressions
6013The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6014the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6015@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6016@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6017@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6018@smallexample
6019precedence associativity Operators Notes
6020(highest)
60211 left ! - ~ (1)
60222 left * / %
60233 left + -
60244 left >> <<
60255 left == != > < <= >=
60266 left &
60277 left |
60288 left &&
60299 left ||
603010 right ? :
603111 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6032(lowest)
6033@end smallexample
6034Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6035(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6036(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6037@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6038@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6039@tex
6040\vskip \baselineskip
6041%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6042\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6043\hrule
6044\halign
6045{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6046height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6047&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6048height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6049\noalign{\hrule}
6050height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6051&highest&&&&&\cr
6052% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6053&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6054&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6055&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6056&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6057&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6058&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6059&7&&left&&|&\cr
6060&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6061&9&&left&&||&\cr
6062&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6063&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6064&lowest&&&&&\cr
6065height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6066\hrule}
6067@end tex
6068@iftex
6069{
6070@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6071@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6072@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6073}
6074@end iftex
6075@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6076
6077@node Evaluation
6078@subsection Evaluation
6079@cindex lazy evaluation
6080@cindex expression evaluation order
6081The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6082an expression when absolutely necessary.
6083
6084The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6085address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6086regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6087as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6088
6089However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6090until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6091other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6092for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6093
6094The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6095assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6096allocation.
6097
6098Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6099@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6100
6101If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6102available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6103following
6104@smallexample
6105@group
6106SECTIONS
6107 @{
a1ab1d2a 6108 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6109 @{ *(.text) @}
6110 @}
6111@end group
6112@end smallexample
6113@noindent
6114will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6115address}.
6116
6117@node Expression Section
6118@subsection The Section of an Expression
6119@cindex expression sections
6120@cindex absolute expressions
6121@cindex relative expressions
6122@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6123@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6124@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6125Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6126relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6127using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6128value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6129symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6130operations.
6131
abf4be64
AM
6132Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6133section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6134address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6135@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6136functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6137One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6138(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6139differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6140versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6141section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6142Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6143absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6144given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6145everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6146
6147In the following simple example,
252b5132 6148
7542af2a
AM
6149@smallexample
6150@group
6151SECTIONS
6152 @{
6153 . = 0x100;
6154 __executable_start = 0x100;
6155 .data :
6156 @{
6157 . = 0x10;
6158 __data_start = 0x10;
6159 *(.data)
6160 @}
6161 @dots{}
6162 @}
6163@end group
6164@end smallexample
252b5132 6165
7542af2a
AM
6166both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6167address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6168@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6169section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6170
5c3049d2
AM
6171For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6172addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6173
6174@itemize @bullet
6175@item
c05f749e
AM
6176Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6177operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6178absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6179@item
7542af2a
AM
6180Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6181relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6182and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6183@item
c05f749e
AM
6184Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6185in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6186address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6187before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6188@end itemize
6189
6190The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6191
6192@itemize @bullet
6193@item
6194An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6195@item
6196The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6197@item
9bc8bb33 6198The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6199relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6200(after above conversions) is also a number when
6201@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6202but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6203@item
6204The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6205relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6206section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6207@item
6208The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6209conversions) is an absolute address.
6210@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6211
6212You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6213to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6214create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6215section @samp{.data}:
6216@smallexample
6217SECTIONS
6218 @{
6219 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6220 @}
6221@end smallexample
6222@noindent
6223If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6224@samp{.data} section.
6225
7542af2a
AM
6226Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6227particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6228
252b5132
RH
6229@node Builtin Functions
6230@subsection Builtin Functions
6231@cindex functions in expressions
6232The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6233use in linker script expressions.
6234
6235@table @code
6236@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6237@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6238@cindex expression, absolute
6239Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6240of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6241value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6242normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6243
6244@item ADDR(@var{section})
6245@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6246@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6247Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6248script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6249the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6250@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6251@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6252the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6253@smallexample
6254@group
6255SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6256 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6257 @{
252b5132
RH
6258 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6259 @dots{}
6260 @}
6261 .output :
6262 @{
6263 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6264 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6265 @}
6266@dots{} @}
6267@end group
6268@end smallexample
6269
876f4090
NS
6270@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6271@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6272@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6273@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6274@cindex round up location counter
6275@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6276@cindex round up expression
6277@cindex align expression
6278Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6279to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6280doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6281arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6282expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6283equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6284
6285Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6286next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6287variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6288input sections:
252b5132
RH
6289@smallexample
6290@group
6291SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6292 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6293 *(.data)
6294 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6295 @}
6296@dots{} @}
6297@end group
6298@end smallexample
6299@noindent
6300The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6301a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6302a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6303of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6304
6305The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6306
362c1d1a
NS
6307@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6308@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6309@cindex section alignment
6310Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6311been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6312evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6313the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6314value in that section.
6315@smallexample
6316@group
6317SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6318 .output @{
6319 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6320 @dots{}
6321 @}
6322@dots{} @}
6323@end group
6324@end smallexample
6325
252b5132
RH
6326@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6327@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6328This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6329scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6330section.
6331
2d20f7bf
JJ
6332@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6333@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6334This is equivalent to either
6335@smallexample
6336(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6337@end smallexample
6338or
6339@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6340(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6341 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6342@end smallexample
6343@noindent
6344depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6345for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6346@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6347If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6348memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6349bytes in the on-disk file.
6350
6351This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6352any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6353@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6354be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6355working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6356
6357@noindent
6358Example:
6359@smallexample
6360 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6361@end smallexample
6362
6363@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6364@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6365This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6366evaluation purposes.
6367
6368@smallexample
6369 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6370@end smallexample
6371
a4f5ad88
JJ
6372@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6373@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6374This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6375@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6376When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6377does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6378@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6379boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6380it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6381@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6382padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6383section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6384
6385@smallexample
6386 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6387@end smallexample
6388
252b5132
RH
6389@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6390@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6391@cindex symbol defaults
6392Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6393defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6394return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6395default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6396shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6397the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6398existed, its value is preserved:
6399
6400@smallexample
6401@group
6402SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6403 .text : @{
6404 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6405 @dots{}
6406 @}
6407 @dots{}
6408@}
6409@end group
6410@end smallexample
6411
3ec57632
NC
6412@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6413@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6414Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6415
252b5132
RH
6416@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6417@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6418@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6419Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6420Section LMA}).
6421
2e53f7d6
NC
6422@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6423@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6424Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6425@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6426
252b5132
RH
6427@kindex MAX
6428@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6429Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6430
6431@kindex MIN
6432@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6433Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6434
6435@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6436@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6437@cindex unallocated address, next
6438Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6439This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6440use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6441output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6442
3ec57632
NC
6443@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6444@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6445Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6446
ba916c8a
MM
6447@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6448@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6449Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6450value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6451@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6452will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6453can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6454``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6455name.
6456
252b5132
RH
6457@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6458@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6459@cindex section size
6460Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6461been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6462evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6463@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6464@smallexample
6465@group
6466SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6467 .output @{
6468 .start = . ;
6469 @dots{}
6470 .end = . ;
6471 @}
6472 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6473 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6474@dots{} @}
6475@end group
6476@end smallexample
6477
6478@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6479@itemx sizeof_headers
6480@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6481@cindex header size
6482Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6483information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6484this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6485choose, to facilitate paging.
6486
6487@cindex not enough room for program headers
6488@cindex program headers, not enough room
6489When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6490@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6491number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6492addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6493additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6494room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6495the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6496script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6497you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6498command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6499@end table
6500
6501@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6502@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6503@cindex implicit linker scripts
6504If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6505an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6506linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6507linker will report an error.
6508
6509An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6510
6511Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6512assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6513commands.
6514
6515Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6516at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6517read. This can affect archive searching.
6518
6519@ifset GENERIC
6520@node Machine Dependent
6521@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6522
6523@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6524@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6525sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6526functionality are not listed.
6527
6528@menu
36f63dca
NC
6529@ifset H8300
6530* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6531@end ifset
6532@ifset I960
6533* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6534@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6535@ifset M68HC11
6536* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6537@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6538@ifset ARM
6539* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6540@end ifset
6541@ifset HPPA
6542* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6543@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6544@ifset M68K
6545* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6546@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6547@ifset MIPS
6548* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6549@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6550@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6551* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6552@end ifset
2469cfa2 6553@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6554* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6555@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6556@ifset NDS32
6557* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6558@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6559@ifset NIOSII
6560* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6561@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6562@ifset POWERPC
6563* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6564@end ifset
6565@ifset POWERPC64
6566* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6567@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6568@ifset SPU
6569* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6570@end ifset
74459f0e 6571@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6572* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6573@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6574@ifset WIN32
6575* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6576@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6577@ifset XTENSA
6578* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6579@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6580@end menu
6581@end ifset
6582
252b5132
RH
6583@ifset H8300
6584@ifclear GENERIC
6585@raisesections
6586@end ifclear
6587
6588@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6589@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6590
6591@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6592For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6593you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6594
6595@table @emph
6596@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6597@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6598@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6599targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6600program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6601respectively.
6602
6603@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6604@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6605@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6606@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6607sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6608page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6609(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6610@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6611top page of memory).
1502569c 6612
81f5558e
NC
6613@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6614indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6615displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6616the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6617@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6618whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6619range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6620
1502569c 6621@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6622@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6623biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6624which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6625page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6626(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6627@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6628the top page of memory).
6629
6630@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6631@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
663232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6633changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6634(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6635@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6636the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6637@end table
6638
6639@ifclear GENERIC
6640@lowersections
6641@end ifclear
6642@end ifset
6643
36f63dca 6644@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6645@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6646@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6647@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6648@node Renesas
6649@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6650
c2dcd04e
NC
6651@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6652H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6653options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6654@end ifset
6655@end ifclear
6656
6657@ifset I960
6658@ifclear GENERIC
6659@raisesections
6660@end ifclear
6661
6662@node i960
6663@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6664
6665@cindex i960 support
6666
6667You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6668specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6669family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6670incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6671linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6672libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6673search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6674
6675For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6676well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6677paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6678the names
6679
6680@smallexample
6681@group
6682try
6683libtry.a
6684tryca
6685libtryca.a
6686@end group
6687@end smallexample
6688
6689@noindent
6690The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6691two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6692
6693You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6694the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6695use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6696specifies a library.
6697
6698@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6699@cindex relaxing on i960
6700@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6701you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6702@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6703them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6704instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6705instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6706target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6707not itself call any subroutines).
6708
6709@ifclear GENERIC
6710@lowersections
6711@end ifclear
6712@end ifset
6713
6714@ifset ARM
6715@ifclear GENERIC
6716@raisesections
6717@end ifclear
6718
93fd0973
SC
6719@ifset M68HC11
6720@ifclear GENERIC
6721@raisesections
6722@end ifclear
6723
6724@node M68HC11/68HC12
6725@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6726
6727@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6728
6729@subsection Linker Relaxation
6730
6731For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6732optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6733
6734@table @emph
6735@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6736@item relaxing address modes
6737@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6738targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6739program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6740respectively.
6741
6742@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6743transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6744page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6745
6746@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6747When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6748of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6749addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6750@code{bset} instructions.
6751
6752@end table
6753
6754@subsection Trampoline Generation
6755
6756@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6757@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6758For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6759call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6760will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6761trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6762case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6763point to the function trampoline.
6764
6765@ifclear GENERIC
6766@lowersections
6767@end ifclear
6768@end ifset
6769
36f63dca 6770@node ARM
3674e28a 6771@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6772
6773@cindex ARM interworking support
6774@kindex --support-old-code
6775For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6776between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6777been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6778line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6779libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6780option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6781given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6782which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6783the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6784non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6785
6786@cindex thumb entry point
6787@cindex entry point, thumb
6788@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6789The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6790@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6791But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6792branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6793executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6794
ce11ba6c
KT
6795@cindex PE import table prefixing
6796@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6797The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6798the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6799element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6800import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6801
e489d0ae
PB
6802@cindex BE8
6803@kindex --be8
6804The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6805executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6806objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6807option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6808little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6809
3674e28a
PB
6810@cindex TARGET1
6811@kindex --target1-rel
6812@kindex --target1-abs
6813The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6814@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6815or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6816and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6817
6818@cindex TARGET2
6819@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6820The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6821@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6822meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6823@table @samp
6824@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6825@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6826@item abs
6827@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6828@item got-rel
6829@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6830@end table
6831
319850b4
JB
6832@cindex FIX_V4BX
6833@kindex --fix-v4bx
6834The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6835specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6836interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6837also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6838
6839In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6840linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6841@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6842
6843In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6844relocations are ignored.
6845
845b51d6
PB
6846@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6847@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6848Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6849relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6850
6851@smallexample
6852TST rM, #1
6853MOVEQ PC, rM
6854BX Rn
6855@end smallexample
6856
6857This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6858and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6859condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6860
33bfe774
JB
6861@cindex USE_BLX
6862@kindex --use-blx
6863The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6864BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6865situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6866code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6867each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6868
6869This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6870specify it if you are using that target.
6871
c6dd86c6
JB
6872@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6873@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6874The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6875bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6876instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6877to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6878the support code can read the intended values.
6879
6880The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6881intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6882and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6883intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6884full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6885you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6886
6887If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6888enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6889@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6890mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6891vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6892@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6893
6894If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6895potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6896such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6897first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6898instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6899the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6900are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6901
2de70689
MGD
6902@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6903@kindex --fix-arm1176
6904@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6905The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6906in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6907are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6908unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6909
9d5777a3 6910Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6911Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6912http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6913
a504d23a
LA
6914@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6915@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6916
6917The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6918workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6919the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6920off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6921the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6922core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6923integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6924VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6925
6926The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6927necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6928
6929The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6930@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6931STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6932linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6933@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6934
6935If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6936potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6937such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6938replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6939branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6940then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6941
6942The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6943the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6944
6945The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6946they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6947there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6948occurs.
6949
6950The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6951PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6952large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6953cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6954occurs.
6955
bf21ed78
MS
6956@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6957@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6958The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6959warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6960enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6961linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6962using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6963not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6964
6965@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6966@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6967The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6968warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6969@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6970linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6971using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6972
726150b7
NC
6973@cindex PIC_VENEER
6974@kindex --pic-veneer
6975The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6976ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6977is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6978@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6979
6980@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6981@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6982The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6983code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6984perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6985placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6986controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6987The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6988duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6989group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6990code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6991where they should be placed.
6992
6993The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6994@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6995placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6996branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6997placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6998value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6999exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7000A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7001linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7002from the input sections.
7003
7004The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7005@samp{N = +1}.
7006
1a51c1a4
NC
7007Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7008only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7009otherwise.
7010
1db37fe6
YG
7011@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7012@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7013@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7014The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7015
7016The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7017
68fcca92
JW
7018@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7019@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7020@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7021The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7022
7023Please contact ARM for further details.
7024
1db37fe6
YG
7025@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7026@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7027@cindex Merging exidx entries
7028The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7029
7030@kindex --long-plt
7031@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7032The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7033which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7034entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7035
1f56df9d
JW
7036@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7037@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7038The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7039link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7040
4ba2ef8f
TP
7041@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7042All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7043Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7044@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7045veneers in memory.
7046
54ddd295
TP
7047@kindex --cmse-implib
7048@cindex Secure gateway import library
7049The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7050specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7051secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7052executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7053
0955507f
TP
7054@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7055@cindex Input import library
7056The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7057must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7058given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7059in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7060@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7061library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7062library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7063for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7064specified.
7065
36f63dca
NC
7066@ifclear GENERIC
7067@lowersections
7068@end ifclear
7069@end ifset
7070
7071@ifset HPPA
7072@ifclear GENERIC
7073@raisesections
7074@end ifclear
7075
7076@node HPPA ELF32
7077@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7078@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7079@kindex --multi-subspace
7080When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7081import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7082The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7083stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7084multiple sub-spaces.
7085
7086@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7087@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7088Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7089stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7090@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7091sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7092a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7093the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7094conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7095prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7096A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7097branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7098@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7099@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7100detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7101positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7102
7103Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7104single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7105create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7106large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7107
7108@ifclear GENERIC
7109@lowersections
7110@end ifclear
7111@end ifset
7112
7fb9f789
NC
7113@ifset M68K
7114@ifclear GENERIC
7115@raisesections
7116@end ifclear
7117
7118@node M68K
7119@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7120
7121@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7122@kindex --got=@var{type}
7123The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7124The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7125@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7126the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7127@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7128entries only at non-negative offsets.
7129@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7130entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7131support such GOTs.
7132@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7133output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7134file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7135files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7136
7137@ifclear GENERIC
7138@lowersections
7139@end ifclear
7140@end ifset
7141
833794fc
MR
7142@ifset MIPS
7143@ifclear GENERIC
7144@raisesections
7145@end ifclear
7146
7147@node MIPS
7148@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7149
7150@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7151@kindex --insn32
7152@kindex --no-insn32
7153The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7154microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7155in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7156used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7157or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7158including 16-bit ones where possible.
7159
8b10b0b3
MR
7160@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7161@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7162@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7163The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7164control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7165@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7166relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7167calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7168relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7169instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7170or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7171the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7172
833794fc
MR
7173@ifclear GENERIC
7174@lowersections
7175@end ifclear
7176@end ifset
7177
36f63dca
NC
7178@ifset MMIX
7179@ifclear GENERIC
7180@raisesections
7181@end ifclear
7182
7183@node MMIX
7184@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7185For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7186@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7187understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7188can translate between the two formats.
7189
7190There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7191Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7192registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7193equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7194@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7195global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7196this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7197symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7198
7a2de473
HPN
7199Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7200@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7201The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7202of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7203
7204Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7205are left out from an mmo file.
7206
7207@ifclear GENERIC
7208@lowersections
7209@end ifclear
7210@end ifset
7211
7212@ifset MSP430
7213@ifclear GENERIC
7214@raisesections
7215@end ifclear
7216
7217@node MSP430
7218@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7219For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7220will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7221just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7222
7223@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7224The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7225
7226@table @code
7227@item @samp{.vectors}
7228Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7229
7230@item @samp{.bootloader}
7231Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7232in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7233
7234@item @samp{.infomem}
7235Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7236this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7237
c0065db7 7238@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7239This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7240in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7241
7242@item @samp{.noinit}
7243Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7244
c0065db7 7245The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7246@end table
7247
7248@ifclear GENERIC
7249@lowersections
7250@end ifclear
7251@end ifset
7252
35c08157
KLC
7253@ifset NDS32
7254@ifclear GENERIC
7255@raisesections
7256@end ifclear
7257
7258@node NDS32
7259@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7260@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7261For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7262relaxes objects according to these options.
7263
7264@table @code
7265@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7266Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7267
7268@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7269Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7270
7271@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7272Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7273
7274@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7275Export the EX9 table after linking.
7276
7277@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7278Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7279
7280@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7281Update the existing EX9 table.
7282
7283@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7284Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7285
7286@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7287Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7288
7289@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7290Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7291
7292@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7293Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7294@end table
7295
7296@ifclear GENERIC
7297@lowersections
7298@end ifclear
7299@end ifset
7300
78058a5e
SL
7301@ifset NIOSII
7302@ifclear GENERIC
7303@raisesections
7304@end ifclear
7305
7306@node Nios II
7307@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7308@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7309@kindex --relax on Nios II
7310
7311Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7312transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7313which may result in @command{ld} giving
7314@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7315The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7316trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7317outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7318trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7319be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7320larger than 256MB.
7321
7322The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7323is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7324@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7325locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7326source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7327register as a temporary.
7328
7329Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7330relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7331option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7332
7333@ifclear GENERIC
7334@lowersections
7335@end ifclear
7336@end ifset
7337
2a60a7a8
AM
7338@ifset POWERPC
7339@ifclear GENERIC
7340@raisesections
7341@end ifclear
7342
7343@node PowerPC ELF32
7344@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7345@cindex PowerPC long branches
7346@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7347Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7348displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7349@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7350@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7351the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7352section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7353section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7354@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7355both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7356considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7357
7358@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7359@table @option
7360@cindex PowerPC PLT
7361@kindex --bss-plt
7362@item --bss-plt
7363Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7364generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7365the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7366writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7367@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7368PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7369compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7370BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7371
016687f8
AM
7372@kindex --secure-plt
7373@item --secure-plt
7374@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7375@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7376when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7377layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7378style BSS PLT.
7379
2a60a7a8
AM
7380@cindex PowerPC GOT
7381@kindex --sdata-got
7382@item --sdata-got
7383The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7384sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7385@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7386section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7387@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7388@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7389@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7390@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7391PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7392pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7393GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7394really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7395
7396@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7397@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7398@item --emit-stub-syms
7399This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7400symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7401
7402@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7403@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7404@item --no-tls-optimize
7405PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7406sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7407disable the optimization.
7408@end table
7409
7410@ifclear GENERIC
7411@lowersections
7412@end ifclear
7413@end ifset
7414
7415@ifset POWERPC64
7416@ifclear GENERIC
7417@raisesections
7418@end ifclear
7419
7420@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7421@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7422
7423@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7424@table @option
7425@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7426@kindex --stub-group-size
7427@item --stub-group-size
7428Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7429by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7430@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7431sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7432a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7433the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7434conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7435prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7436A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7437branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7438@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7439@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7440detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7441positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7442
7443Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7444single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7445create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7446large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7447
7448@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7449@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7450@item --emit-stub-syms
7451This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7452symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7453
7454@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7455@kindex --dotsyms
7456@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7457@item --dotsyms
7458@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7459These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7460in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7461function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7462code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7463properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7464to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7465@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7466dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7467feature.
7468
7ae4ea7d
AM
7469@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7470@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7471@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7472@item --save-restore-funcs
7473@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7474These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7475provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7476@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7477function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7478link.
7479
2a60a7a8
AM
7480@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7481@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7482@item --no-tls-optimize
7483PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7484sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7485disable the optimization.
7486
7c9cf415
AM
7487@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7488@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7489@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7490@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7491@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7492These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7493stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7494an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7495@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7496stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7497option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7498Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7499slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7500application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7501normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7502
2a60a7a8
AM
7503@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7504@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7505@item --no-opd-optimize
7506PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7507corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7508the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7509Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7510
7511@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7512@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7513@item --non-overlapping-opd
7514Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7515@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7516the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7517entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7518
7519@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7520@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7521@item --no-toc-optimize
7522PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7523entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7524reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7525marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7526marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7527relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7528unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7529reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7530discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7531reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7532code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7533optimization.
7534
7535@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7536@kindex --no-multi-toc
7537@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7538If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7539@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7540where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7541entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7542total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7543grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7544TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7545calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7546help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
754764K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7548Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7549
7550@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7551@kindex --no-toc-sort
7552@item --no-toc-sort
7553By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7554happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7555placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7556with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7557referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7558@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7559results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7560off this feature.
7561
7562@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7563@kindex --plt-align
7564@kindex --no-plt-align
7565@item --plt-align
7566@itemx --no-plt-align
7567Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7568padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7569specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7570that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7571stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7572
7573@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7574@kindex --plt-static-chain
7575@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7576@item --plt-static-chain
7577@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7578Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7579chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7580chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7581
7582@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7583@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7584@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7585@item --plt-thread-safe
7586@itemx --no-thread-safe
7587With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7588lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7589another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7590order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7591memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7592barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7593looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7594seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7595default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7596@end table
7597
7598@ifclear GENERIC
7599@lowersections
7600@end ifclear
7601@end ifset
7602
49fa1e15
AM
7603@ifset SPU
7604@ifclear GENERIC
7605@raisesections
7606@end ifclear
7607
7608@node SPU ELF
7609@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7610
7611@cindex SPU ELF options
7612@table @option
7613
7614@cindex SPU plugins
7615@kindex --plugin
7616@item --plugin
7617This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7618
7619@cindex SPU overlays
7620@kindex --no-overlays
7621@item --no-overlays
7622Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7623regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7624@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7625turns off all this special overlay handling.
7626
7627@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7628@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7629@item --emit-stub-syms
7630This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7631symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7632
7633@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7634@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7635@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7636This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7637function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7638on calls to non-overlay regions.
7639
7640@cindex SPU local store size
7641@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7642@item --local-store=lo:hi
7643@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7644the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7645range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7646
c0065db7 7647@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7648@kindex --stack-analysis
7649@item --stack-analysis
7650SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7651unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7652under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7653@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7654@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7655determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7656for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7657for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7658for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7659find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7660and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7661under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7662dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7663is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7664and calls will be given.
7665
c0065db7 7666@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7667@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7668@item --emit-stack-syms
7669This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7670in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7671These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7672functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7673functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7674such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7675The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7676@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7677@end table
7678
7679@ifclear GENERIC
7680@lowersections
7681@end ifclear
7682@end ifset
7683
36f63dca
NC
7684@ifset TICOFF
7685@ifclear GENERIC
7686@raisesections
7687@end ifclear
7688
7689@node TI COFF
7690@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7691@cindex TI COFF versions
7692@kindex --format=@var{version}
7693The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7694TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7695also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7696format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7697header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7698
7699@ifclear GENERIC
7700@lowersections
7701@end ifclear
7702@end ifset
7703
2ca22b03
NC
7704@ifset WIN32
7705@ifclear GENERIC
7706@raisesections
7707@end ifclear
7708
7709@node WIN32
7710@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7711
c0065db7 7712This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7713See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7714command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7715
7716@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7717@cindex import libraries
7718@item import libraries
69da35b5 7719The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7720libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7721regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7722archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7723support for creating such libraries provided with the
7724@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7725
c0065db7
RM
7726@item exporting DLL symbols
7727@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7728The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7729
7730@table @emph
7731@item using auto-export functionality
7732@cindex using auto-export functionality
7733By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7734which is controlled by the following command line options:
7735
0a5d968e
NC
7736@itemize
7737@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7738@item --exclude-symbols
7739@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7740@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7741@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7742@end itemize
7743
09e2aba4
DK
7744When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7745(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7746symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7747often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7748private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7749options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7750exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7751final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7752
7753If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7754command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7755if either of the following are true:
7756
7757@itemize
7758@item A DEF file is used.
7759@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7760@end itemize
dc8465bf 7761
c0065db7
RM
7762@item using a DEF file
7763@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7764Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7765an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7766exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7767name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7768command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7769
7770@example
7771gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7772@end example
7773
0a5d968e
NC
7774Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7775@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7776
dc8465bf
NC
7777Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7778
7779@example
4b5bd4e7 7780LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7781
7782EXPORTS
7783foo
7784bar
7785_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7786another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7787var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7788doo = foo == foo2
7789eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7790@end example
dc8465bf 7791
7fcab871 7792This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7793symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7794alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7795by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7796@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7797@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7798export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7799in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7800symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7801
6b31ad16
DS
7802The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7803name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7804the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7805
b45619c0
NC
7806When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7807library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7808@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7809executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7810
7811With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7812specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7813non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7814
7815If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7816or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7817filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7818
4b5bd4e7
DS
7819The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7820
7821@example
7822EXPORTS
7823 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7824 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7825 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7826@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7827
7828Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7829@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7830@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7831@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7832Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7833@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7834string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7835
7836The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7837
7838@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7839will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7840by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7841linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7842library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7843
7844@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7845The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7846the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7847@code{*_imp__foo}).
7848
7849@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7850well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7851read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7852variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7853the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7854extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7855application will behave unexpectedly.
7856
7857@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7858it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7859symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7860API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7861the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7862
4b5bd4e7
DS
7863See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7864other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7865
7866@cindex creating a DEF file
7867While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7868with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7869
7870@item Using decorations
7871@cindex Using decorations
7872Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7873itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7874declared as:
7875
7876@example
7877__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7878__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7879@end example
7880
7881All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7882any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7883this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7884the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7885
7886Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7887decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7888instead:
7889
7890@example
7891__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7892__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7893@end example
7894
c0065db7
RM
7895This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7896when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7897variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7898code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7899of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7900omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7901@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7902information.
c0065db7 7903@end table
dc8465bf 7904
2ca22b03
NC
7905@cindex automatic data imports
7906@item automatic data imports
7907The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7908by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7909compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7910issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7911code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7912c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7913initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7914decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7915platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7916command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7917The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7918suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7919trigger the feature's use.
7920
c0065db7 7921auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7922additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7923
c0065db7 7924"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7925documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7926
c0065db7
RM
7927The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7928occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7929One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7930below.
7931
7932@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7933For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7934object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7935offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7936field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7937in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7938without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7939The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7940references.
7941
c0065db7
RM
7942The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7943be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7944themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7945runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7946compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7947support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7948run without error on an older system.
7949
c0065db7
RM
7950@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7951enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7952
7953@cindex direct linking to a dll
7954@item direct linking to a dll
7955The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7956including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7957libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7958traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7959libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7960function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7961though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7962storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7963tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7964large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7965
c0065db7 7966Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7967@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7968of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7969perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7970select the dll instead of an import library.
7971
2ca22b03 7972
69da35b5
NC
7973For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7974to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7975
7976@example
45e948fe
NC
7977libxxx.dll.a
7978xxx.dll.a
7979libxxx.a
7980xxx.lib
69da35b5 7981cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7982libxxx.dll
7983xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7984@end example
7985
69da35b5
NC
7986before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7987
c0065db7
RM
7988(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7989where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7990@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7991file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7992@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7993
c0065db7
RM
7994Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7995@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7996was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7997various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7998could coexist on the same machine.
7999
2ca22b03
NC
8000The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8001applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8002libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8003
8004@example
8005bin/
8006 cygxxx.dll
8007lib/
8008 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8009 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8010@end example
8011
c0065db7
RM
8012Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8013done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8014
80151. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8016@example
8017gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8018@end example
2ca22b03 8019
69da35b5
NC
8020However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8021(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8022@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8023not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8024
2ca22b03
NC
80252. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8026directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8027should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8028making the app/dll.
8029
8030@example
8031ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8032@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8033
8034Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8035
8036@example
8037gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8038@end example
69da35b5
NC
8039
8040This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8041perfectly legal
8042
8043@example
8044bin/
8045 cygxxx-5.dll
8046lib/
c0065db7 8047 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8048@end example
8049
dc8465bf 8050Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8051even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8052@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8053
8054Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8055wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8056
80571. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8058work with auto-imported data.
8059
dc8465bf
NC
80602. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8061import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8062symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8063for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8064possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8065
45e948fe
NC
80663. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8067critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8068in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8069stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8070
69da35b5 8071So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8072true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8073a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8074binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8075massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8076requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8077will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8078
c0065db7 8079@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8080@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8081@item adding additional names
8082Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8083A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8084exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8085when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8086import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8087
c0065db7 8088@example
dc8465bf
NC
8089LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8090
8091EXPORTS
c0065db7 8092foo
dc8465bf 8093_foo = foo
c0065db7 8094@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8095
8096The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8097
8098Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8099source code using the "weak" attribute:
8100
c0065db7
RM
8101@example
8102void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8103void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8104@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8105
8106See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8107symbols.
8108
8109@item renaming symbols
8110Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8111kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8112@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8113DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8114created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8115
c0065db7 8116@example
dc8465bf
NC
8117LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8118
8119EXPORTS
8120_foo = foo
c0065db7 8121@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8122
8123The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8124@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8125@end table
dc8465bf 8126
0a5d968e 8127Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8128unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8129If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8130@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8131that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8132@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8133renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8134to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8135the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8136In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8137which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8138
8139@cindex weak externals
8140@item weak externals
8141The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8142weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8143defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8144are three variants of weak externals:
8145@itemize
8146@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8147called lazy externals.
8148@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8149This form is not presently implemented.
8150@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8151implemented.
8152@end itemize
8153As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8154are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8155uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8156
8157@cindex aligned common symbols
8158@item aligned common symbols
8159As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8160desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8161the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8162carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8163by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8164tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8165but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8166warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8167
2ca22b03
NC
8168@end table
8169
8170@ifclear GENERIC
8171@lowersections
8172@end ifclear
8173@end ifset
8174
e0001a05
NC
8175@ifset XTENSA
8176@ifclear GENERIC
8177@raisesections
8178@end ifclear
8179
8180@node Xtensa
8181@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8182
8183@cindex Xtensa processors
8184The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8185@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8186specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8187keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8188example, with the command:
8189
8190@smallexample
8191SECTIONS
8192@{
8193 .text : @{
8194 *(.literal .text)
8195 @}
8196@}
8197@end smallexample
8198
8199@noindent
8200@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8201and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8202literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8203interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8204group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8205files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8206and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8207
43cd72b9 8208@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8209@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8210Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8211provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8212is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8213literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8214will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8215location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8216the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8217unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8218@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8219range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8220
8221For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8222to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8223instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8224instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8225instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8226@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8227hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8228By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8229switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8230density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8231instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8232performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8233linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8234a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8235
8236The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8237control the linker:
8238
8239@cindex Xtensa options
8240@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8241@item --size-opt
8242When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8243more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8244no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8245alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8246preserve the correctness of the code.
8247@end table
e0001a05
NC
8248
8249@ifclear GENERIC
8250@lowersections
8251@end ifclear
8252@end ifset
8253
252b5132
RH
8254@ifclear SingleFormat
8255@node BFD
8256@chapter BFD
8257
8258@cindex back end
8259@cindex object file management
8260@cindex object formats available
8261@kindex objdump -i
8262The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8263These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8264object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8265format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8266it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8267associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8268object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8269(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8270list all the formats available for your configuration.
8271
8272@cindex BFD requirements
8273@cindex requirements for BFD
8274As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8275several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8276BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8277formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8278been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8279BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8280may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8281
8282One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8283mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8284useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8285conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8286
8287@menu
8288* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8289@end menu
8290
8291@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8292@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8293@cindex opening object files
8294@include bfdsumm.texi
8295@end ifclear
8296
8297@node Reporting Bugs
8298@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8299@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8300@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8301
ff5dcc92 8302Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8303
8304Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8305it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8306to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8307work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8308@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8309
8310In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8311information that enables us to fix the bug.
8312
8313@menu
8314* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8315* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8316@end menu
8317
8318@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8319@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8320@cindex bug criteria
8321
8322If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8323
8324@itemize @bullet
8325@cindex fatal signal
8326@cindex linker crash
8327@cindex crash of linker
8328@item
8329If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8330@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8331
8332@cindex error on valid input
8333@item
ff5dcc92 8334If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8335
8336@cindex invalid input
8337@item
ff5dcc92 8338If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8339may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8340object files are correct.
8341
8342@item
8343If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8344improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8345@end itemize
8346
8347@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8348@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8349@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8350@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8351
8352A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8353products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8354recommend you contact that organization first.
8355
8356You can find contact information for many support companies and
8357individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8358distribution.
8359
ad22bfe8 8360@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8361Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8362@value{BUGURL}.
8363@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8364
8365The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8366@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8367fact or leave it out, state it!
8368
8369Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8370problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8371assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8372matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8373the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8374location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8375were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8376into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8377specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8378and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8379
8380Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8381the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8382on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8383
8384Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8385bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8386respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8387You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8388
8389To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8390
8391@itemize @bullet
8392@item
ff5dcc92 8393The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8394the @samp{--version} argument.
8395
8396Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8397the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8398
8399@item
ff5dcc92 8400Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8401patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8402
8403@item
8404The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8405version number.
8406
8407@item
ff5dcc92 8408What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8409``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8410
8411@item
8412The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8413observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8414list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8415sufficient.
8416
8417If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8418and then we might not encounter the bug.
8419
8420@item
8421A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8422bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8423provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8424bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8425state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8426requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8427we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8428attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8429
8430If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8431@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8432object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8433@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8434how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8435
8436@item
8437A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8438incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8439
ff5dcc92 8440Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8441will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8442not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8443a chance to make a mistake.
8444
8445Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8446say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8447copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8448C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8449and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8450fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8451you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8452any conclusion from our observations.
8453
8454@item
ff5dcc92 8455If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8456diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8457@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8458If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8459context, not by line number.
8460
8461The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8462sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8463@end itemize
8464
8465Here are some things that are not necessary:
8466
8467@itemize @bullet
8468@item
8469A description of the envelope of the bug.
8470
8471Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8472which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8473changes will not affect it.
8474
8475This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8476will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8477with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8478We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8479
8480Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8481of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8482output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8483less time, and so on.
8484
8485However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8486report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8487
8488@item
8489A patch for the bug.
8490
8491A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8492the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8493a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8494to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8495
ff5dcc92 8496Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8497construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8498through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8499able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8500fixed.
8501
8502And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8503patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8504help us to understand.
8505
8506@item
8507A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8508
8509Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8510things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8511@end itemize
8512
8513@node MRI
8514@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8515@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8516To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8517linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8518alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8519described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8520simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8521@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8522linker commands; these commands are described here.
8523
8524In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8525file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8526features to make use of them.
8527
8528You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8529@samp{-c} command-line option.
8530
8531Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8532command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8533blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8534MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8535issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8536
8537Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8538
8539You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8540lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8541The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8542
8543@table @code
8544@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8545@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8546@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8547Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8548the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8549@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8550your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8551script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8552commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8553input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8554@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8555
8556@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8557@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8558Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8559in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8560
8561@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8562
8563@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8564@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8565Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8566@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8567
8568@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8569@item BASE @var{expression}
8570Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8571absolute addresses) in the output file.
8572
8573@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8574@item CHIP @var{expression}
8575@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8576This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8577
8578@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8579@item END
8580This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8581
8582@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8583@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8584Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8585language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8586
8587@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8588@item
252b5132
RH
8589S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8590
8591@item
8592IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8593
8594@item
8595COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8596@samp{COFF}
8597@end enumerate
8598
8599@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8600@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8601Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8602@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8603
8604The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8605same line, with no change in its effect.
8606
8607@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8608@item LOAD @var{filename}
8609@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8610Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8611same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8612command line.
8613
8614@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8615@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8616@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8617MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8618option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8619
8620@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8621@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8622@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8623Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8624order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8625script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8626sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8627file, in the order specified.
8628
8629@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8630@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8631@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8632@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8633Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8634@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8635
8636@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8637@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8638@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8639@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8640You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8641specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8642If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8643@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8644@end table
8645
793c5807
NC
8646@node GNU Free Documentation License
8647@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8648@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8649
370b66a1
CD
8650@node LD Index
8651@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8652
8653@printindex cp
8654
8655@tex
7ca01ed9 8656% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8657% meantime:
8658\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8659\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8660\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8661\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8662\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8663\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8664\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8665\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8666\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8667% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8668@end tex
8669
252b5132 8670@bye
This page took 1.502196 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.